Utax CD 1075 Copy System Instruction

I N S T R U C T I O N H A N D B O O K

UTAX CD 1075

please read the instruction handbook carefully before using this machine. keep it close to the machine for easy reference.

We have determined as a participating company in the International

Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.

About the International Energy Star Program

International Energy Star Program has as its basic goals the promotion of efficient energy use and the reduction of the environmental pollution that accompanies energy consumption by promoting the manufacture and sale of products that fulfill program standards.

International Energy Star Program standards require that copies come equipped with a “Low Power Mode” where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as an “Off Mode” where the device automatically turns itself off after there is no activity within a set amount of time. When the copier includes printer and fax functions, the printer and fax must enter a “Low Power Mode” where power consumption is automatically reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since they were last used, and they must also support a

“Sleep Mode” where power consumption is reduced to a minimum when there is no activity within a set amount of time.

This product is equipped with the following features as a result of its compliance with International Energy Star Program standards.

●

Low Power Mode

The device automatically enters “Low Power Mode” when 15 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before “Low Power Mode” is activated may be lengthened. See “Energy-saving preheat function” for more information.

●

Off Mode

The device automatically enters “Off Mode” when 90 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before “Off Mode” is activated may be lengthened. For more information see “Auto shut-off function”.

●

Sleep Mode (If the copier has printer and/or facsimile function)

The device automatically enters “Sleep Mode” when 90 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before “Sleep Mode” is activated may be lengthened. For more information see “Auto shut-off function”.

●

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function

The Energy Star Program encourages the use of 2-sided copying which reduces the load on the environment and this device includes 2sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.

For more information see “Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals [2-sided copy modes]”.

● Paper Recycling

The Energy Star Program encourages the use of environmentally friendly recycled paper. Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

<IMPORTANT>

The instructions contained herein are based on the 75 cpm

CD 1075

copier.

NOTE:

This Operation Guide contains information that corresponds to using both the inch and metric versions of this copier.

Within the text we have generally indicated messages by listing that for the inch version followed, in brackets, by the corresponding information for the metric version. However, when a message is essentially the same, or when the difference is only one of upper- and lower-case spelling, we have listed the information specifically as it is displayed in the inch version of this machine.

All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the Publisher.

Legal Restriction On Copying

• It may be prohibited to copy copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.

• It is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies.

• Copying other items may be prohibited.

Please read this Operation Guide before using the copier. Keep it close to the copier for easy reference.

The sections of this guide and parts of the copier marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the copier. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below.

DANGER

: Indicates that serious injury or even death will very possibly result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

WARNING

: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION

: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols

The m symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol.

................. [General warning]

................. [Warning of danger of electrical shock]

................. [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.

.................. [Warning of prohibited action]

................... [Disassembly prohibited]

The ● symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

.................. [Alert of required action]

.................. [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

.................. [Always connect the copier to an outlet with a ground connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this

Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing. (fee required)

<Note>

An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this copier is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

i

CONTENTS

Section 1

IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST. .. 1-1

CAUTION LABELS ............................................................. 1-1

INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS ........................................ 1-2

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE ................................................ 1-3

Section 2

NAMES OF PARTS ............................... 2-1

1. Main body ........................................................................... 2-1

2. Operation panel .................................................................. 2-4

3. Touch panel ........................................................................ 2-6

Section 3

PREPARATIONS ................................... 3-1

1. Loading paper .................................................................... 3-1

(1) Note when adding paper ........................................... 3-1

(2) Loading paper into drawers[cassettes] No.1 ............. 3-2

(3) Loading paper into drawers[cassettes]

No.2 and No.3 ........................................................... 3-3

(4) Setting paper on the multi-bypass tray ...................... 3-4

(5) Loading paper into the Side Feeder (an optional drawer[cassette] ) ...................................................... 3-6

2. Setting originals .................................................................. 3-7

(1) Setting originals in the Document Processor ............ 3-7

(2) Setting originals on the platen ................................... 3-8

3. Adding toner ....................................................................... 3-9

4. Replacing the waste toner box ......................................... 3-11

Section 4

BASIC OPERATION .............................. 4-1

1. Basic copying procedure .................................................... 4-1

2. Enlarging/reducing the copy image .................................... 4-5

(1) Auto magnification selection mode ............................ 4-5

(2) Zoom mode ............................................................... 4-6

(3) Preset zoom mode .................................................... 4-7

(4) XY zoom mode .......................................................... 4-8

3. Interrupt copying ................................................................. 4-9

4. Job reservation ................................................................. 4-10

5. Energy-saving preheat function ........................................ 4-11

6. Auto shut-off function ....................................................... 4-11

Section 5

OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS .... 5-1

1. Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals

[2-sided copy modes] ......................................................... 5-1

(1) Making 2-sided copies from a 2-sided original .......... 5-1

(2) Making 2-sided copies from an open-faced (books, etc.) original ............................... 5-1

(3) Making 2-sided copies from one-sided originals ......... 5-2

2. Copying two-page originals onto separate sheets

[Page separation/Split copy modes] ................................... 5-4

(1) Page separation/Split copy from book originals ........ 5-4

(2) Page separation/Split copy from 2-sided originals .... 5-4

3. Making a margin space on the copies [Margin mode] ........ 5-6

(1) Standard margin .......................................................... 5-6

(2) Separate front and back margin settings ..................... 5-6

4. Centering the copy image [Centering/Image shift mode] ... 5-8

5. Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes

[Memo mode] ..................................................................... 5-9

6. Making copies with clean edges [Border erase modes] ... 5-11

(1) Erasing blemishes from edges of copies

(Sheet erase mode) ................................................. 5-11

(2) Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of copies made from books (Book erase mode) ...... 5-11

7. Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page [Combine/Merge Copy modes] .......... 5-13

(1) 2 in 1 ........................................................................ 5-13

(2) 4 in 1 ........................................................................ 5-13

8. Printing page numbers on copies

[Print page numbers mode] .............................................. 5-16

9. Overlaying one image over another

[Form overlay mode] ......................................................... 5-20

10. Making booklets from sheet originals

[Booklet/Stitching mode] .................................................. 5-22

11. Making booklets from book originals

[Book to Booklet mode] .................................................... 5-25

12. Automatic sorting of copy sets without the

Document Finisher [Sort/Finished mode] ......................... 5-28

13. Auto rotation function ....................................................... 5-29

14. Auto selection/Filing mode ............................................... 5-30

15. Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets

[Cover mode] .................................................................... 5-32

16. Original size selection mode ............................................ 5-35

17. Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies

[Transparency + backing sheet mode] .............................. 5-37

18. Inverting black and white [Invert mode] ............................ 5-39

19. Making mirror image copies [Mirror image mode] ............ 5-40

20. Making a test copy prior to large volume copying

[Proof mode] ..................................................................... 5-41

21. Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished

[Repeat copy mode] ......................................................... 5-43

(1) Registering a copy job for repeat copying ............... 5-43

(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode ................... 5-44

22. Copying a large volume of originals in one operation

[Batch scanning mode] ..................................................... 5-48 ii

23. Saving on toner use [Eco print mode] .............................. 5-49

24. Original set direction ........................................................ 5-50

25. Memorizing frequently used settings

[Program function] ............................................................ 5-51

(1) Registering a program ............................................. 5-51

(2) Using programmed settings to make copies ........... 5-52

(3) Changing a registered program name ..................... 5-52

(4) Deleting a registered program ................................. 5-53

26. Registration keys .............................................................. 5-54

(1) Registering a function or mode under a function key ................................................ 5-54

(2) Deleting a registration key ....................................... 5-56

27. Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation [Job build mode] ...................... 5-58

(1) Using the job build mode ......................................... 5-58

(2) Selecting the settings and functions ........................ 5-63

Section 6

DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT

MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ............... 6-1

1. Document management functions .................................... 6-1

(1) What are the “document management” functions? ... 6-1

(2) Form registration ....................................................... 6-1

(3) Shared data box ........................................................ 6-4

(4) Synergy print boxes ................................................... 6-9

2. Output management functions ......................................... 6-20

(1) What are the “output management” functions? ....... 6-20

(2) Display of the output management functions .......... 6-20

(3) The “Print status” screen ......................................... 6-21

(4) The “Job history” screen .......................................... 6-22

CONTENTS

4. Multi-bypass tray paper settings ....................................... 7-66

(1) Paper size and type ................................................. 7-66

(2) Selecting other standard sizes ................................ 7-67

5. Box management default settings .................................... 7-69

(1) Box settings ............................................................. 7-69

(2) Accessing the box management default settings .... 7-69

(3) Making box management default settings ............... 7-70

6. Hard disk management .................................................... 7-74

7. Report print out ................................................................. 7-76

8. Changing the language used for messages ..................... 7-78

9. Entering characters .......................................................... 7-79

Section 8

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ...................... 8-1

(1) Side Feeder ............................................................... 8-1

(2) Document Finisher .................................................... 8-1

(3) Key Counter .............................................................. 8-7

(4) Printer Kit ................................................................... 8-7

(5) Network Scanner Kit .................................................. 8-7

(6) Tandem Copier Kit ..................................................... 8-8

Section 9

TROUBLESHOOTING ........................... 9-1

1. If one of the following messages is displayed .................... 9-1

2. If one of these indicators lights or flashes .......................... 9-6

3. If paper jams ...................................................................... 9-7

(1) Cautions .................................................................... 9-7

(2) Misfeed location indicators ........................................ 9-7

(3) Removal procedures ................................................. 9-8

4. If other trouble occurs ...................................................... 9-21

Section 7

COPIER MANAGEMENT

FUNCTIONS .......................................... 7-1

1. Copy management mode ................................................... 7-1

(1) What’s in the “copy management mode” screen? ..... 7-1

(2) Accessing the copy management mode settings ...... 7-3

(3) Making copy management settings ........................... 7-4

(4) Making copies when copy management is turned ON ................................................................ 7-13

2. Weekly timer ..................................................................... 7-14

(1) Settings for the weekly timer ................................... 7-14

(2) Accessing the weekly timer settings ........................ 7-14

(3) Making weekly timer settings .................................. 7-15

3. Default settings ................................................................. 7-18

(1) Machine default settings .......................................... 7-18

(2) Accessing the machine default settings .................. 7-21

(3) Making machine default settings ............................. 7-22

(4) Copy default settings ............................................... 7-36

(5) Accessing the copy default settings ........................ 7-39

(6) Making copy default settings .................................. 7-40

Section 10

MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION

INFORMATION .................................... 10-1

1. Cleaning the copier .......................................................... 10-1

2. Specifications ................................................................... 10-2

3. Installing the optional equipment ...................................... 10-4

Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart ............. 10-6 iii

●

MAKING FULL USE OF THE COPIER'S ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

1

Having the copier automatically select copy paper of the same size as the original

<Auto paper selection mode>

(Page 4-2)

2

Making clear reproductions of photographs

<Image quality selection>

(Page 4-3) abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abc defghi jkmn

3

Various functions for making enlarged and reduced copies

■

Enlarging/reducing the copy image to fit the size of paper in a specified drawer[cassette]

<Auto magnification selection mode>

(Page 4-5)

11" ✕ 17" (A3)

8 1/2 "

✕

11" (A4)

129% (141%)

5 1/2 "

✕

8 1/2 " (A5) 64% (70%)

■

Enlarging/reducing the copy image to a desired size between 25% and 400%

(between 25% and 200% when using the

Document Processor)

<Zoom mode> (Page 4-6)

■

One-touch selection of the copy magnification ratio

<Preset zoom mode>

(Page 4-7)

■

Enlarging/reducing the length and width of the image to separate magnification ratios

<XY zoom mode>

(Page 4-8)

25%

400%

4

Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals

<2-sided copy modes>

(Page 5-1)

1

2

3

4

5

2

4

1

3

5

5

Copying each image of open-faced

(books, etc.) or 2-sided originals onto separate sheets

<Page separation/Split copy modes>

(Page 5-4)

12 1 2

1 2 2 1

M M

Y %

X %

6

Creating a margin on the copies

<Margin mode>

(Page 5-6)

7

Centering the copy image

<Centering/Image shift mode>

(Page 5-8)

8

Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes

<Memo mode>

(Page 5-9)

9

Making copies with clean edges

<Border erase modes>

(Page 5-11)

10

Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page

<Combine/Merge Copy modes>

(Page 5-13)

11

Printing page numbers on the copies

<Print page numbers mode>

(Page 5-16)

A

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

12

Overlaying one image over another

<Form overlay mode>

(Page 5-20)

A

B

C

A

B

C

13

Making booklets from sheet originals

<Booklet/Stitching mode>

(Page 5-22) a a b b

14

Making booklets from books

<Book to Booklet mode>

(Page 5-25)

16

Automatic rotation of the copy image

<Auto rotation function>

(Page 5-29)

A

B

A

B

17

Copying different sized originals at the same time

<Auto Selection/Filing mode>

(Page 5-30)

15

Automatic sorting of copy sets without the

Document Finisher

<Sort/Finished mode>

(Page 5-28)

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

1

1

1

2

3

3

3

3

18

Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets

<Cover mode>

(Page 5-32)

2

3

4

5

6

2

4

6

3

5

1

AB 1

AB 1

1

19

Feeding paper as a backing sheet for

OHP transparencies

<Transparency + backing sheet mode>

(Page 5-37)

20

Inverting black and white

<Invert mode>

(Page 5-39)

A

B

22

Making a test copy prior to large volume copying

<Proof mode>

(Page 5-41)

23

Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished

<Repeat copy mode>

(Page 5-43)

21

Making mirror image copies

<Mirror image mode>

(Page 5-40)

24

Copying a large volume of originals in one operation

<Batch scanning mode>

(Page 5-48)

A B C

A

B

C

25

Saving on toner use

<Eco print mode>

(Page 5-49)

26

Memorizing frequently used settings

<Program function>

(Page 5-51)

27

Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation

<Job build mode>

(Page 5-58)

28

Registering images to be used for form overlay

<Form registration>

(Page 6-1)

29

Managing shared forms

<Shared data box>

(Page 6-4)

30

Printing out different stored originals in one operation

<Synergy print boxes>

(Page 6-9)

31

Using department ID-codes to manage the number of copies made by each department

<Copy management mode>

(Page 7-1)

32

Turning the power to the copier ON/OFF automatically on a set schedule

<Weekly timer function>

(Page 7-14)

33

Changing the language used in the touch panel

<Language selection function>

(Page 7-78)

Español English

34

A full range of optional equipment is available

■

Side Feeder

(Page 8-1)

■ Document Finisher

(Page 8-1)

■ Document Finisher + Multi Job Tray +

Center-Folding Unit

(Page 8-1)

■

Key Counter

(Page 8-7)

■

Printer Kit

(Page 8-7)

■

Network Scanner Kit

(Page 8-7)

■

Tandem Copier Kit

(Page 8-8)

Section 1 IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST.

CAUTION LABELS

Caution labels have been attached to the copier at the following locations for safety purposes.

BE SUFFICIENTLY CAREFUL to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner.

Label 4

DO NOT touch the support area for the Document Processor as there is a danger that your fingers or other objects may become caught or pinched, and this can result in injury. .............................................

Label 1

High voltage inside. NEVER touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of electric shock. ............

Label 2

High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned. ..........................................

Label 3

High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned. ..........................................

Label 5

DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner bottle or the waste toner box.

Dangerous sparks may cause burns. ............................................

NOTE: DO NOT remove these labels.

1-1

INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS

■

Environmment

CAUTION

• Avoid placing the copier on or in locations which are unstable or not level. Such locations may cause the copier to fall down or fall over. This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage to the copier. .............................

• During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the copier is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.

■

Power supply/Grounding the copier

• Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug, clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock. ....................................................

WARNING

• Avoid locations near radiators, heaters, or other heat sources, or locations near flammable items, to avoid the danger of fire. ...................................

• DO NOT use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock. .........

• To keep the copier cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance, allow access space as shown below. Leave adequate space, especially around the vents, to allow air to be properly ventilated out of the copier. ..................................

• Plug the power cord securely into the outlet. If metallic objects come in contact with the prongs on the plug, it may cause a fire or electric shock.

Rear:

3 15/16 "

10 cm

• Always connect the copier to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an earth connection is not possible, contact your service representative. .........................................

Left:

23

5/8

"

60 cm

Other precautions

• Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the copier.

Front:

39 3/8 "

100 cm

Right:

27 9/16 "

70 cm

• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the socket/outlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.

• Always use the caster stoppers to stabilize the copier once it is in place to keep it from moving and/or falling over and causing injury. ..................

■

Handling of plastic bags

WARNING


• Adverse environmental conditions may affect the safe operation and performance of the copier. Install in an airconditioned room (recommended room temperature: around 68



F (20



C), humidity: around 65%) and avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the copier.

. Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

. Avoid locations with vibrations.

. Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.

. Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

. Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

• Keep the plastic bags that are used with the copier away from children. The plastic may cling to their nose and mouth causing suffocation. .......

• If the floor is delicate against casters, when this product is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.

1-2

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE

■

Cautions when using the copier

WARNING

• DO NOT place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near the copier. This of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside. ...................................................................

• DO NOT remove any of the covers from the copier as there is a danger of electrical shock from high voltage parts inside the copier. ............

• DO NOT damage, break or attempt to repair the power cord. DO NOT place heavy objects on the cord, pull it, bend it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage.

These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock. ...............................................

• NEVER attempt to repair or disassemble the copier or its parts as there is a danger of fire, electrical shock or damage to the laser. If the laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it causing blindness. ................................................

• If the copier becomes excessively hot, smoke appears from the copier, there is an odd smell, or any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the main switch OFF (O) immediately, BE ABSOLUTELY

CERTAIN to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact your service representative. .....................................................

• If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other fluids, etc.) falls into the copier, turn the main switch OFF (O) immediately. Next, BE

ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN to remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock. Then contact your service representative. .....................................................

• DO NOT remove or connect the power plug with wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical shock. ...................................................................

• ALWAYS contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts. ...............

CAUTION

• DO NOT pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the wires may become broken and there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. (ALWAYS grasp the power plug when removing the power cord from the outlet.) ............................................................

• ALWAYS remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the copier. If the power cord is damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. ...................................................................

• If the copier will not be used for a short period of time (overnight, etc.), turn the main switch OFF

(O).

If it will not be used for an extended period of time (vacations, etc.), remove the power plug from the outlet for safety purposes during the time the copier is not in use. ................................

• ALWAYS hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the copier. ..................................

• For safety purposes, ALWAYS remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning operations. ...........................................................

• If dust accumulates within the copier, there is a danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cleaning of internal parts. This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with your service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the copier. ..........

• DO NOT leave the Document Processor open as there is a danger of personal injury. .....................

1-3

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE


• DO NOT place heavy objects on the copier or cause other damage to the copier.

• DO NOT open the front cover, turn off the main switch, or pull out the power plug during copying.

• When lifting or moving the copier, contact your service representative.

• Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static electricity.

• DO NOT attempt to perform any operations not explained in this handbook.

• CAUTION : Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful.

• This copier comes equipped with an HDD (hard disk).

DO NOT attempt to move the copier while the power is still ON; Since any resulting shock or vibration may cause damage to the hard disk, be sure to turn off the power BEFORE attempting to move the copier.

■

Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

• DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner bottle or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. .........................................................

• Keep the toner bottle and the waste toner box out of the reach of children. ........................................

• If toner happens to spill from the toner bottle or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and skin. ......................................................................

. If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.

. If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth out with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.

. If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness, contact a physician.

. If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

• DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner bottle or the waste toner box. ......................


• After use, ALWAYS dispose of the toner bottle and the waste toner box in accordance with Federal, State and

Local rules and regulations.

• Store all consumables in a cool, dark location.

• If the copier will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette, return it to its original package and reseal it.

1-4

Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS

1. Main body

1 Operation panel

(Perform copy operations here.)

2 Cover on the right side of the operation panel

(Open this cover when you need to add toner.)

3 Front cover

(Open this cover if a paper misfeed occurs inside the copier.)

4 Original tray

(Depending upon the country or region where you purchased your copier, this part may not be included.)

5 Drawer[Cassette] No.1

(This drawer[cassette] has a storage capacity of 3,000 sheets of standard copy paper.)


(This drawer[cassette] has a storage capacity of 500 sheets of standard copy paper.)


(This drawer[cassette] has a storage capacity of 500 sheets of standard copy paper.)

8 Paper width guide release levers

(Pinch these levers and adjust the guide plates to fit the width of the paper that is to be loaded in that drawer[cassette].)

9 Paper length guide release levers

(Pinch these levers and adjust the guide plate to fit the length of the paper that is to be loaded in that drawer[cassette].)

0 Multi-bypass tray

(Set copy paper on this tray when you want to copy onto small paper sizes or onto special types of paper.)

!

Insert guides

(Align these guides to fit the width of the paper that is to be set on the multi-bypass tray.)

@ Multi-bypass extension

(Pull out this extension when copying onto 8

1/2

" x 11", 8

1/2

" x 14",

11" x 17", A4R, B4 or A3 size paper.)

# Right upper cover


$ Right lower cover


% Original size indicator lines

(Be sure to align the original with these lines whenever setting an original on the platen.)

^ Platen

(Set originals here for copying. Lay originals face-down and align the edges with the size indicator lines located on the left and rear sides of the platen.)

& Handles for transport

(Pull these bars out - two on both the left and right sides of the copier - in order to use them as handles.)

2-1


* Original table

(Set originals to be copied on this table.)

( Original insert guides

(Align these guides to fit the width of the originals to be copied.)

) Document Processor cover

(Open this cover if an original misfeed occurs.)

⁄ Original set indicator

(This indicator lights when originals are set in the Document

Processor.)

¤ Original eject table

(Originals that have been copied are ejected and stored here.)

‹ Document Processor handle

(Hold this handle when you want to open the Document

Processor.)

› Ejection extension

(Open this extension when using larger sized originals such as

8

1/2

" x 14", 11" x 17", B4 and A3.) ﬁ Total counter

(This counter displays the total number of copies made on the copier up to this point.) ﬂ Fixing unit handle

(Operate this handle out if a paper misfeed occurs inside the copier.)

‡ Transfer unit handle

(Operate this handle out if a paper misfeed occurs inside the copier.)

— Transfer unit release lever

(Operate this lever when you need to pull out the transfer unit.)

· Transfer unit

(Pull this unit out if a paper misfeed occurs inside the copier.)

‚ Fixing unit

Œ Duplex Unit

(Pull this unit out if a paper misfeed occurs inside the copier.)

2-2


„ Main switch

(Turn this switch ON ( | ) before copying.)

´ Left cover


‰ Copy eject tray

(Finished copies are ejected and stored on this tray.)

ˇ Waste toner box

Á Waste toner box cover

(Open this cover when replacing the waste toner box.)

¨ Handles for transport

(Pull these bars out - two on both the left and right sides of the copier - in order to use them as handles.)

2-3


2. Operation panel

@ !

0 * & ^ % $ 7 6 5 4

# 9 8 1 2 3

1 [Start] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key when the lamp in that key is lit green and you want to start copying.)

2 [Stop/Clear] key

(Press this key when you want to stop copying or change the number of copies to be made.)

3 [Reset] key

(Press this key to reset all functions to their initial mode settings.

See “Initial mode” on page 2-5.)

4 [Energy Saver] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key when you want to turn the energy-saving preheat mode ON. Press the same key again to turn the preheat mode

OFF. See page 4-11.)

5 [Interrupt] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to perform interrupt copying. See page 4-9.)

6 [Management] key

(When copy management is turned ON, press this key after copying in order to return to the department ID-code entry display.

See page 7-1.)

7 [ ] (default setting) key

(Press this key when you want to perform default settings as well as those related to copy management, etc.)

8 Keypad

(Use these keys when you want to set the number of copies to be made or enter other values.)

9 Touch panel

(This panel displays such information as operation procedures, machine status, and the various function keys.)

0 Brightness adjustment control dial

(Turn this dial when you want to adjust the brightness of the touch panel.)

!

[Copier] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the copier functions of this machine.)

@ [Printer] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key when you want to use the optional printer functions of this machine. The lamp in that key will light when the machine is in the printer operation mode. The indicator to the left of the key will either light green or orange, or will flash, depending upon the status of the machine. See page 9-6.)

# [Scanner] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key when you want to use the optional scanner functions of this machine. The lamp in that key will light when the machine is in the scanner operation mode. The indicator to the left of the key will either light green or orange, or will flash, depending upon the status of the machine. See page 9-6.)

$ [Auto Selection] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the auto selection mode. See page 5-30.)

% [Job Build] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the job build mode. See page 5-58.)

^ [Repeat Copy] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the repeat copy mode. See page 5-43.)

& [Job Queue] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the output management functions of the copier. See page 6-20.)

* [Document Management] key & indicator lamp

(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the document management functions of the copier.

See page 6-1.)

2-4

●

Initial mode (at the end of warm-up or when the [Reset] key is pressed)

In the default settings prepared at the factory, paper of the same size as the original is selected automatically and the copy magnification ratio is set to “100%” [1:1] (under the auto paper selection mode), the number of copies to be made is set to “1” and the image quality is set to the text+photo mode.

NOTES

• The default settings for the initial mode can be changed using the corresponding “copy default settings” procedure.

• It is possible for you to change the default setting for the copy exposure in the initial mode from the “manual exposure mode” to the

“auto exposure mode”. (See “Exposure mode” on page 7-40.)

●

Auto clear function

Once a designated amount of time has passed after copying stops

(between 10 and 270 seconds), the auto clear function will automatically engage and the copier will return to the same settings as those after warm up (initial mode settings). (However, the copy exposure mode and the image quality mode will not change.) Copies can continually be made using the same settings (copy mode, number of copies and exposure mode) if the next batch of copying is started before the auto clear function engages.

●

Automatic drawer[cassette] switching function

If two drawers[cassettes] contain the same size of paper in the same orientation and the paper in one drawer[cassette] runs out during copying, the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function will switch paper feed from the empty drawer[cassette] to the other drawer[cassette] that still contains paper.

It is also possible to designate which drawers[cassettes] will hold the same size and type of paper for automatic switching.

NOTE

The automatic drawer[cassette] switching function can be turned OFF.

(See “Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF” on page 7-22.)


2-5


3. Touch panel

Inch specifications

4

&

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

8 1 /

2

1 /

2

"

1 1 /

2

/

2

" "

1 1 /

2

/

2

" "

Basic

Ready to copy.

1

AMS

2

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

* 6 5 9 8 ( 7 !

@ ) 0 # $ %

3

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge

^

Metric specifications

4

&

1 2

Paper Size

Set

3

Ready to copy.

Plain

Basic

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

* 6 5 9 8 ( 7 !

@ ) 0 # $ %

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

^

2-6

1 This area displays messages on the machine's status and on operational procedures.

2 This area displays information on the size of paper in the drawer[cassette] and the current copy magnification ratio.

3 This area displays the current number of copies to be made.

4 Paper size keys

(Touch these keys when you want to change the currently selected drawer[cassette] in order to change the size of paper that will be used. The drawer[cassette] that holds the currently selected paper size and type of paper will be highlighted.)

5 “APS” key

(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the paper size selected automatically. See page 4-2.)

6 “Bypass” key

(Touch this key when you want to copy onto paper that is set on the multi-bypass tray. The type of paper registered for use on the multi-bypass tray will be indicated in the key.)

7 “AMS” key

(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the copy magnification ratio selected automatically. See page 4-5.)

8 “Reduce/Enlarge” key

(Touch this key when you want to manually change the copy magnification ratio. See page 4-6.)

9 “100%” (same size) key

(Touch this key when you want to copy the original image at its actual size “100%”.)

0 Copy exposure adjustment keys / Copy exposure scale

(Touch the appropriate key when you want to manually adjust the copy exposure. The copy exposure scale will indicate the currently selected setting. See page 4-2.)

!

“Exposure mode” key

(Touch this key when you want to access the “Exposure Mode” screen.)

@ “Auto Exposure” key

(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to select the auto exposure mode. In the auto exposure mode, the contrast of the original will be detected and the most suitable exposure level selected automatically. See page 4-2.)

# “Sort:OFF” key

(Touch this key when you want to make copies without sorting them.)

$ “Sort:ON” key

(Touch this key when you want to make copies in the sort mode.)

% “Sort/Finish” key

(Touch this key when you want to access the “Sort/Finish” screen.

See page 5-28.)

^ Registration keys

(Touch the appropriate key when you want to access the corresponding function or mode. Any function or mode in the

“Function” tab can be registered to be displayed as one of the registration key. See page 5-54.)

& “Basic” tab

(Touch this tab when you want to return the display to the contents of the “Basic” tab.)


* “User choice” tab

(Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the “User choice” tab.)

Inch specifications

2 sided /

Separation

Basic

Orig. image quality

Select orig. size

Proof Copy

User choice Function

Border

Erase

Form

Overlay

Program

Cover

Mode


2-sided /

Split

Basic

Image quality

Test copy

User choice

Select size orig.

Function

Erase

Mode

Form overlay

Program

Cover

Mode

( “Function” tab

(Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the

“Function” tab.)

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror Up

Down

Basic User choice Function Program


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy

Large # of originals

Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

Paper size

Set Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert

Basic User choice Function

Memo pages

Mirror

Program

Up

Down

2-7


) “Program” tab

(Touch this tab when you want to register the currently selected settings as a program, or to delete a previously registered program. See page 5-51.)

NOTE

If you press any key that has an arrow ( P ) in its bottom right corner, the corresponding setting screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

“Register” key

(Touch this key when you want to register the currently selected function or mode under a registration key. See page 5-54.)

“Back” key

(Touch this key when you want to return the settings for the currently selected mode back to their previous values.)

“Close” key

(Touch this key when you want to return to the previous screen.)

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Register

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

100%

Back

Set

Close

(25~400)

100 %

# Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"

➔

11x17"

154%

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

" ➔ 8 1 /

2 x14"

129%

8 1 /

2 x11" ➔ 11x17"

121%

8 1 /

2 x14" ➔ 11x17"

78%

8 1 /

2 x14"

➔

8 1 /

2 x11"

77%

11x17" ➔ 8

64%

11x17" ➔ 8

50%

11x17" ➔ 5

25%

1 /

2 x14"

1 /

2 x11"

1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"


Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Register

Paper size

Back

100%

Set

Close

(25~400)

100 %

#-Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

A 5

➔

A 3

141% A 4

➔

A 3

A 5 ➔ A 4

127%

Folio

➔

A 3

106%

11x15"

➔

A 3

90%

Folio

➔

A 4

75%

70%

11x15" ➔ A 4

A 3 ➔ A 4

A 4

➔

A 5

50%

25%

Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)

Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Register

Paper size

Back

100%

Set

Close

(25~400)

100 %

#-Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

141%

122%

A 5

➔

A 3

115%

86%

A 4

➔

A 3

B 5 ➔ B 4

A 4

➔

A 5

➔

B 4

B 5

B 4 ➔ A 3

B 5

➔

A 4

A 3 ➔ B 4

A 4

➔

B 5

81%

70%

50%

25%

B 4 ➔ A 4

B 5 ➔ A 5

A 3 ➔ A 4

B 4

➔

B 5

2-8

NOTE

You can change or add new keys to those displayed in the “Basic” and the “User choice” tabs by following the “Customize screen layout

(Main functions)” procedure on page 7-64 or the “Customize screen layout (Add functions)” procedure on page 7-65, as appropriate.

Section 3 PREPARATIONS

1. Loading paper

Paper can be loading into 4 locations in this copier: the 3 drawers[cassettes] and the multi-bypass tray.

(1) Note when adding paper

After taking new paper out of its packaging, be sure to fan through them a few times to separate the sheets before loading the paper into a drawer[cassette] or setting the paper on the multi-bypass tray.

Set the paper in the drawer[cassette] or on the multi-bypass tray with the side that was facing upward when you opened the package still facing upward.

IMPORTANT!

Using special paper

In this copier, the type of paper loaded in each drawer[cassette] and on the multi-bypass tray can be specified under “Paper type

(drawer[cassette] No.1 - No. 4)” on page 7-24 and “(1) Paper size and type” on page 7-66, respectively.

Among the special paper that can be use with this copier, there is a wide range in paper quality and construction, especially in those types of paper noted below. For that reason, there is a greater possibility of problems occurring during copying with these type of paper.

Whenever you do use such special paper as noted here, it is recommended that you first make a test copy and verify the results.

<Special paper for which extra caution is recommended>

• Preprinted

• Labels * 1

• Prepunched

• Envelopes * 2

*1: When using label sheets, be absolutely certain that there is no possibility that the backing glue will come into contact with any part of the copier, and that none of the labels will come off the sheet during copying. If glue does happen to come into contact with the drum or rollers, or one of the labels comes off inside the copier, it can be the cause of major damage.

*2: The following types of envelopes should never be used:

• Those on which the glue is exposed.

• Those whereby glue will be exposed if the protective paper is removed. (If the paper protecting the glue comes off inside the copier it can be the cause of major damage.)

• Those of special construction.

• Those which have a round tab on the back and are closed with string.

• Those which have an open window.

• Those which have a transparent film window.

IMPORTANT!

• When copying onto used paper (paper which has already been copied onto at least one side), DO NOT use paper that is stapled or clipped together as this can be the cause of damage to the copier and/or create problems in the copy image.

• If you use paper that is curled at all, straighten the paper out before loading it into a drawer[cassette] or setting it on the multi-bypass tray, or it can cause a paper jam.

3-1


(2) Loading paper into drawer[cassette] No.1

Up to 3000 sheets of standard copy paper (75 g/m 2 – 80 g/m 2 ) or color paper (1500 sheets side-by-side) can be loaded into drawer[cassette] No.1.

IMPORTANT!

The type of paper loaded in each drawer[cassette] must be specified under “Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)” on page 7-24.

IMPORTANT!

• Make sure there are no folds, etc., in the paper you load into the drawer[cassette]. Folds, etc., can cause paper jams.

• DO NOT load more paper than is indicated by the sticker located on the inside of the drawer[cassette] (shown as 1 in the illustration).

• When you are loading paper into the drawer[cassette], make sure that the side that was facing upward when you opened the package is still facing upward.

1

1 Pull the drawer[cassette] that you want to load paper into out toward you as far as it will go.

* DO NOT pull out more than one drawer[cassette] at a time.

2 Set paper in both sides of the drawer[cassette].

NOTE

When you load paper into the drawer[cassette], the side facing downward is the side that will be copied.

3 Gently push the drawer[cassette] back in.

NOTE

If you will not be using the copier for a prolonged period of time, remove all paper from the drawers[cassettes] and seal it in its original packaging in order to protect it against moisture.

3-2

(3) Loading paper into drawers[cassettes] No.2 and

No.3

Up to 500 sheets of standard copy paper (75 g/m 2 – 80 g/m 2 ) or color paper can be loaded into drawers[cassettes] No.2 and No.3.

• Inch specifications

Each drawer[cassette] can hold paper of any size between 11" x 17" and 5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

".

• Metric specifications

Each drawer[cassette] can hold paper of any size between A3 and

A5R.

IMPORTANT!

• In metric specification copiers, the size of paper loaded in each drawer[cassette] must be specified under “Paper size

(drawer[cassette] No.2 & No.3)” on page 7-23.

• The type of paper loaded in each drawer[cassette] must be specified under “Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)” on page 7-24.

1 Pull the drawer[cassette] that you want to load paper into out toward you as far as it will go.

* DO NOT pull out more than one drawer[cassette] at a time.


3 Pinch the release levers and move the paper width guide plates to fit the width of the paper that is to be loaded in that drawer[cassette].

4 Align the paper flush against the right side of the drawer[cassette], and then set the paper in the drawer[cassette].

2 Pinch the release levers and move the paper length guide plate to fit the length of the paper that is to be loaded in that drawer[cassette]. The paper sizes are marked on the bottom of the drawer[cassette].

IMPORTANT!

• Make sure there are no folds, etc., in the paper you load into the drawer[cassette]. Folds, etc., can cause paper jams.

• DO NOT load more paper than is indicated by the sticker located on the inside of the drawer[cassette] (shown as 1 in the illustration).

• When you are loading paper into the drawer[cassette], make sure that the side that was facing upward when you opened the package is still facing upward.

• Be absolutely certain to adjust the paper length and width guides to the appropriate size before setting the paper. Improper setting of these guides may be the cause of skewed paper feed or paper jams.

• Make sure that the paper is set securely against the paper length and width guide plates. If there is a gap between the paper and any guide plate, readjust the guide plates to fit the paper snugly.

1

3-3


NOTE

When you load paper into the drawer[cassette], the side facing downward is the side that will be copied.

5 Insert the appropriate paper size label into the front of the drawer[cassette] to indicate the size of paper that is loaded into that drawer[cassette].

1 Open the multi-bypass tray.

NOTE

When copying onto paper of a size larger than 8

1/2

" x 11" or A4R, be sure to pull out the multi-bypass extension.

6 Gently push the drawer[cassette] back in.

NOTE

If you will not be using the copier for a prolonged period of time, remove all paper from the drawers[cassettes] and seal it in its original packaging in order to protect it against moisture.

(4) Setting paper on the multi-bypass tray

Up to 100 sheets of standard copy paper (75 g/m 2 – 80 g/m 2 ), of a size between 11" x 17"[A3] and 5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

"[A6R] can be set on the multi-bypass tray at one time. When copying onto special paper, be sure to use the multi-bypass tray.

NOTE

The types of special paper and the number of sheets that can be set on the multi-bypass tray at one time are as follows:

Tracing paper: 1 sheet

Letterhead: 100 sheets

Color paper: 100 sheets

OHP transparencies: 25 sheets

Standard paper (120 g/m 2 , 160 g/m 2 ): 25 sheets

2 Adjust the insert guides to fit the width of the paper that is to be set on the multi-bypass tray.

3 Slide the paper all the way in, along the insert guides, as far as it will go.

IMPORTANT!

• When copying onto OHP transparencies, be sure to fan through them a few times to separate the sheets before setting them on the multi-bypass tray.

• When copying onto non-standard size paper, perform the procedure in “(1) Paper size and type” on page 7-66 and select the paper size.

• When setting special paper such as OHP transparencies and thick paper on the multi-bypass tray, the type of paper must be specified under “(1) Paper size and type” on page 7-66.

3-4

IMPORTANT!

• When you are loading paper onto the multi-bypass tray, make sure that the side that was facing upward when you opened the package is still facing upward.

Especially if the leading edge of the paper is curled at all, straighten it out before setting it on the multi-bypass tray.

• If the paper is curled at all, straighten it out before setting it on the multi-bypass tray. (The amount of paper curl should be under 10 mm for standard copy paper and 5 mm for postcards.) Depending upon the paper quality, paper might not be fed properly into the multi-bypass tray.

• Make sure there are no folds, etc., in the paper you set onto the multi-bypass tray. Folds, etc., can cause paper jams.

• Make sure the insert guides are fully opened whenever you close the multi-bypass tray.


Perform the following procedure when setting envelopes onto the multi-bypass tray.

1 Open the multi-bypass tray.

2 Adjust the insert guides to fit the width of the envelopes that are to be set on the multi-bypass tray.

NOTE

When you are setting paper onto the multi-bypass tray, make sure that the side to be copied onto is facing upward.

• Setting envelopes onto the multi-bypass tray

It is possible to print onto envelopes when you are using the optional printer functions of this machine.

Up to 10 envelopes can be set onto the multi-bypass tray at one time.

Refer to the following chart for the types and sizes of envelopes which can be used.

Type

Business (Com 10)

ISO DL

ISO C5

YOUKEI2

YOUKEI4

Size

4

1/8

" x 9

1/2

"

110 mm x 220 mm

162 mm x 229 mm

162 mm x 114 mm

234 mm x 105 mm

3 Open the flap and, with the flap facing away from the direction of insertion, slide the envelopes all the way into the multi-bypass tray, along the insert guides, as far as they will go.

* If you do not set the envelopes in the proper orientation, printing may be carried out onto the wrong side or in the wrong direction.

* To register the size of envelopes that you want to use, see “Multi-bypass tray paper settings” on page 7-66.

3-5


(5) Loading paper into the Side Feeder

(an optional drawer[cassette])

Up to 4000 sheets of 11" x 8

1/2

" , A4 or B5 size standard copy paper

(75 g/m 2 – 80 g/m 2 ) can be loaded into the optional Side Feeder.

IMPORTANT!

The type of paper loaded in the Side Feeder must be specified under

“Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)” on page 7-24.

NOTE

If you open the upper cover as well, it will be easier to load paper into the Side Feeder.

3 Align the paper flush against the left side of the paper plate, and then set the paper in the Side Feeder.

NOTE

(Only for metric specification copiers produced for the Asia-Pacific region)

• The standard setting for the Side Feeder is for A4 size paper.

Contact your service representative or authorized service center if you want to change it for use with B5 size paper.

1 Hold down the paper plate up/down switch located on the right side of the Side Feeder.

IMPORTANT!

• Make sure there are no folds, etc., in the paper you load into the

Side Feeder. Folds, etc., can cause paper jams.

• DO NOT load more paper than is indicated by the label located on the inside of the Side Feeder (shown as 1 in the illustration).

• When you are loading paper into the Side Feeder, make sure that the side that was facing upward when you opened the package is still facing upward.

1

NOTES

• If there is no paper in the Side Feeder, the paper plate inside the

Side Feeder will already have been lowered automatically to its lowermost position.

• If the right cover to the Side Feeder is open, the paper plate will not move even if you press this switch.

2 Open the right cover to the Side Feeder.

NOTE

When you are loading paper onto the Side Feeder, make sure that the side to be copied onto is facing upward.

4 Close the upper cover, if necessary, and then close the right cover.

NOTE

If you will not be using the copier for a prolonged period of time, remove all paper from the Side Feeder and seal it in its original packaging in order to protect it against moisture.

3-6


2. Setting originals

(1) Setting originals in the Document Processor

The Document Processor automatically feeds and scans each original, one by one, for copying. You can also have two-sided originals turned over automatically in order to make two-sided copies or separate copies from each side.

3 How to set originals in the Document Processor

1 Adjust the original insert guides to fit the size of the originals.

1 Cautions when using the Document Processor

DO NOT set originals of the follow types in the Document Processor.

In addition, when using perforated sheets or originals with punch holes, DO NOT insert the end with the perforations or holes first.

• OHP film and other transparencies

• Carbon paper, crumpled originals or originals with strong folds, and soft originals such as vinyl

• Originals which are not rectangular, wet originals, and originals with adhesive tape or glue

• Originals with clips or staples (In order to use such originals, remove the clips or staples and straighten any crumples or folds before using them. Failure to do so may cause originals to misfeed.)

• Clippings or originals with very slippery surfaces

• Originals with wet correction fluid

• Originals with folds (If you must use such originals, smooth out the folded portions before setting them in the Document Processor.

Failure to do so may cause originals to misfeed.)

2 Originals that can be set in the Document Processor

• Sheet originals

• Paper weight:

One-sided originals: between 35 g/m 2 - 160 g/m 2

Two-sided originals: between 50 g/m 2 - 120 g/m 2

• Size: Max. 11" x 17" or A3 - Min. 5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

" or A5R

• Number of sheets:

100 sheets (under 11" x 8

1/2

" or A4 size [75 g/m 2 or 80 g/m 2 ])

70 sheets (over 8

1/2

" x 14" or B4 size [75 g/m 2 or 80 g/m 2 ])

30 sheets (when using the auto selection mode)

NOTES

• Before setting any new originals, remove any originals that are remaining on the original ejection table. If ejected originals are left on the original eject table, they may cause other originals to misfeed.

• Be sure to fan through them a few times to separate the sheets before setting originals in the Document Processor.

2 Arrange the originals in order and set them face up (first page face up for two-sided originals) onto the original table.

Slide the leading edge of the originals all the way into the

Document Processor, as far as they will go.

* When setting large size originals such as 8

1/2

" x 14",

11" x 17", B4 or A3, be sure to open the ejection extension.

3-7


IMPORTANT!

DO NOT set more originals than indicated on the sticker that is attached to the rear original insert guide. If more than the acceptable number of originals is set, the originals may not feed properly.

3 Hold the Document Processor handle and close the

Document Processor.

* Leave the Document Processor open whenever you are using an original that is over 4 cm thick.

IMPORTANT!

Avoid placing excessive pressure on the platen when closing the

Document Processor. Too much pressure on the platen may cause the glass to break.

NOTE

When copying from open-faced originals (books, etc.), shadows may appear around the outside edges of, or up the middle between, the copy images.

(2) Setting originals on the platen

To make copies from originals that cannot be set in the Document

Processor (books, magazines, etc.), lift open the Document Processor and set one original at a time on the platen.

1 Hold the Document Processor handle and lift the Document

Processor open.

* Before opening the Document Processor, remove any originals that are on the original table and the original eject table to prevent them from falling off the Document

Processor when it is opened.

CAUTION

DO NOT leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.

2 Set the original face down on the platen and align it with the appropriate original size indicator lines on the left side of the platen.

3-8


3. Adding toner

Add toner when “Add toner” is displayed. Although a few copies can still be made once this message is displayed, you should add toner as soon as possible.

* DO NOT add toner unless this message is displayed.

* Touch the “Adding toner” key to have the procedure for adding toner displayed on the touch panel.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Add toner.

Paper Size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

11x8

1

/

2

"

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

"

Colour

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

"

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

User choice

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge

Adding toner


Ready to copy.

Add toner.

Paper Size Set

Plain

Color

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

Adding toner

CAUTION

DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner bottle or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

CAUTION

DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner bottle or the waste toner box.

1 Open the cover on the right side of the operation panel.

2 Turn the new toner bottle upside down and tap the bottom portion about 10 times or so.

3 Hold the bottle firmly and shake up the contents by turning it upside down and then right-side up 10 or more times in the manner shown in the illustration.

4 Next, hold the bottle horizontally and shake it back and forth

10 or more times.

5 Fit the hole in the toner bottle (located below the N ) over the metal pin (shown as 1 in the illustration) that is protruding out of the toner supply slot.

1

3-9


6 Turn the bottle clockwise 90 degrees and the toner in the bottle will be emptied into the copier.

* Be sure to turn the bottle all the way until it stops, so that the

■

on the bottle is aligned with the M on the main body of the copier.

1

2

9 Pushing down on the toner bottle, turn it back counterclockwise to its original position and slowly remove it from the toner supply slot.

1

2

7 Wait until all of the toner is out of the bottle.

8 Tap the sides of the bottle about 10 times or so in order to get all of the remaining toner out.

CAUTION


CAUTION


10 Close the cover on the right side of the operation panel.

●

After use, ALWAYS dispose of the toner bottle and the waste toner box in accordance with Federal,

State and Local rules and regulations.

IMPORTANT!

DO NOT tap the top (bottom) of the bottle as there is a danger that toner might spill.

3-10

4. Replacing the waste toner box

Replace the waste toner box when “Check waste toner box.” is displayed.

* DO NOT replace the waste toner box unless this message is displayed.

Inch specifications

Check waste toner box.

1.Open lower left cover.

2.Take out the waste toner box.

3.Replace with a new waste toner box.

4.Close cover.


Check waste toner box.

1.Open lower left cover.

2.Take out the waste toner box.

3.Set a new waste toner box.

4.Close cover.


2 Open the cover to the waste toner box.

3 Remove the waste toner box from the copier.

CAUTION


CAUTION


4 Cover the opening to the waste toner box with the attached seal.

1 If the optional Document Finisher is installed on your copier, open the front cover to the Document Finisher, pull the release lever towards you and detach the Document Finisher from the copier.

3

IMPORTANT!

• The waste toner box is NOT reusable.

• Give all used waste toner boxes to your service representative.

2

1

3-11


CAUTION


CAUTION


5 Set the new waste toner box into the copier.

6 Close the cover to the waste toner box.

7 If necessary, reattach the Document Finisher to the copier.

Then, push the release lever back into in its original position and close the front cover to the Document Finisher.

1

3

2

● After use, ALWAYS dispose of the toner bottle and the waste toner box in accordance with Federal,

State and Local rules and regulations.

3-12

Section 4 BASIC OPERATION

1. Basic copying procedure

1

1. Warm-up

Turn the main switch ON ( | ). At the end of warm-up, “Ready to copy.” will be displayed.

NOTE

If you set the originals that you want to copy and press the [Start] key while the copier is still warming up, copying will begin as soon as warm-up is finished.

2

2. Setting the originals

Set the original(s) that you want to copy in the Document Processor or on the platen. If you set an original on the platen, place it at the leftrear corner of the platen and align it with the appropriate original size indicator lines.

NOTE

Refer to “2. Setting originals” on page 3-7 for more detailed information on setting originals.

Ready to copy. 3

3

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

"

Color

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function


Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

3. Selecting the desired functions

Select from among the copier's various modes and functions.

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Com

Ori qua

Red

/En

Paper Size Set

Me

Im qu

Re

En

• Enlarging/reducing the copy image (Page 4-5.)

• Interrupt copying (Page 4-9.)

• Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals (Page 5-1.)

• Copying each image of open-faced (books, magazines, etc.) or

2-sided originals onto separate sheets (Page 5-4.)

• Creating a margin on the copies (Page 5-6.)

• Centering the copy image (Page 5-8.)

• Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes

(Page 5-9.)

• Making copies with clean edges (Page 5-11.)

• Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page (Page 5-13.)

• Printing page numbers on the copies (Page 5-16.)

• Overlaying one image over another (Page 5-20.)

• Making booklets from sheet originals (Page 5-22.)

• Making booklets from books (Page 5-25.)

• Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher

(Page 5-28.)

• Automatic rotation of the copy image (Page 5-29.)

• Copying different sized originals at the same time (Page 5-30.)

• Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets (Page 5-32.)

• Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies

(Page 5-37.)

• Inverting black and white (Page 5-39.)

• Making mirror image copies (Page 5-40.)

• Making a test copy prior to large volume copying (Page 5-41.)

• Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished

(Page 5-43.)

• Copying a large volume of originals in one operation (Page 5-48.)

• Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation (Page 5-58.)

4-1


Ready to copy. 4

4

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

"

Color

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function


Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Co

Ori qua

Red

/En

Paper Size Set

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

4. Selecting the paper size

When the “APS” key is highlighted on the touch panel, copy paper of the same size as the original will be automatically selected. In order to copy the original onto a different size of paper without changing the size of the image, touch the paper size key that corresponds to the paper size that you want to use.

Me

Im qu

Re

En

NOTES

• You can stop the copier from automatically selecting the paper size.

(See “Paper selection” on page 7-46.)

• It is also possible for you to specify one drawer[cassette] that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that drawer.

(See “Default drawer[cassette]” on page 7-48.)

5

AMS pass n

Reduce

/Enlarge

Inch specifications

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

5 ass n

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge


Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

5. Adjusting the copy exposure

Adjustment of the copy exposure is generally accomplished manually.

If you want to make the exposure darker, touch the right exposure adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the right; If you want to make the exposure lighter, touch the left exposure adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the left.

If you want the copy exposure to be adjusted automatically, touch the

“Auto Exposure” key until it is highlighted. The contrast of the original will be detected and the most suitable exposure level selected automatically.

* It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure by touching the “Exposure Mode” key to access the “Exposure Mode” screen.

Copy exposure adjustment can then be performed in this screen using the same methods as above.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11x8

1 /

2

"

Set

Back Close

1 2 3 4 5 6

Register

7

Auto

Manual Lighter Darker

/


Ready to copy.

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

Auto


NOTES

• It is possible for you to make adjustments to the auto exposure mode if the overall copies come out too dark or too light.

(See “Auto exposure adjustment” on page 7-51.)

• It is also possible for you to change the default setting for the copy exposure to the auto exposure mode.

(See “Exposure mode” on page 7-40.)

4-2

6

2 sided /

Separation

Orig. image quality

Select orig. size

Cover

Mode

Proof Copy

User choice Basic

Inch specifications

Function

Border

Erase

Form

Overlay

Program

6

2-sided /

Split

Image quality

Select size orig.

Erase

Mode

Cover

Mode

Test copy

User choice Basic


Function

Form overlay

Program

6. Selecting the image quality

The image quality is selected according to the type of original.

Touch the “User choice” tab and then the resulting “Orig. image quality” [“Image quality”] key that is displayed within that tab in order to access the “Orig.image quality” [“Image quality orig.”] screen.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Orig.image quality Register

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back Close

Tex t P h o t o : S e t t h i s m o d e t o c o py o r i g .

w i t h m i xe d t ex t a n d p h o t o

P h o t o : A d d a d i m e n s i o n a l e f fe c t o f p h o t o

Tex t : C o py a p e n c i l o r f i n e l i n e.

Text Photo

Photo

Text


Ready to copy.

Image quality orig.

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

Text+Photo

Photo

Text

Tex t + P h o t o : S e t t h i s m o d e t o c o py

o r i g i n a l m i xe d ( t ex t & p h o t o ) .

P h o t o : A d d a d i m e n s i o n a l e f fe c t o f p h o t o.

Tex t : C o py p e n c i l & f i n e l i n e c l e a r l y.

Text+photo mode: Touch the “Text+Photo” key until it is highlighted.

Select this mode when the original contains a

Photo mode: mixture of both text and photographs.

Touch the “Photo” key until it is highlighted. Select

Text mode: this mode to bring out the depth in photographs.

Touch the “Text” key until it is highlighted. Select this mode especially to reproduce originals written in pencil of which contain thin lines.

NOTES

• It is possible for you to select the image quality mode that will be the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Original quality” on page 7-42.)

• It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure in each of the image quality modes. (See “Manual exposure adjustment

(text+photo mode)” on page 7-53, “Manual exposure adjustment

(text mode)” on page 7-54 and “Manual exposure adjustment

(photo mode)” on page 7-55.)

7


Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

AMS Sort:Off

S t O

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge Auto

Inch specifications

Paper Size Set

7

AMS Sort:Off

S t O

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge Auto


7. Setting the number of copies to be made

Use the keypad to change the number of copies to be made that is displayed on the touch panel to the actual number that you want to make. Up to 999 copies can be made at one time.

NOTE

It is possible for you to limit the number of copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time. (See “Copy limit” on page 7-60.)

8

8. Start copying

Press the [Start] key. Once the lamp in the [Start] key is lit green and

“Ready to copy.” is displayed, copying is possible.

Inch specifications

Now copying.

O r i g . p a g e

11x8 1 /

2

"

1-sided

R top / Rear

C o u n t / S e t

11x8 1 /

2

"

1-sided

Sort

Plain

O u t p u t

Cancel

Change

Exposure


Now copying.

O r i g i n a l

1-sided

R top / Rear

1-sided

Sort

C o u n t / s e t

Plain

O u t p u t

Change

Exposure

Cancel

4-3


9

9. At the end of copying

Finished copies will be ejected onto the copy eject tray.

IMPORTANT!

Up to 250 copies can be stored on the copy eject tray.

CAUTION

If the copier will not be used for a short period of time

(overnight, etc.), turn the main switch OFF (O).

If it will not be used for an extended period of time

(vacations, etc.), remove the power plug from the outlet for safety purposes during the time the copier is not in use.

4-4


2. Enlarging/reducing the copy image

(1) Auto magnification selection mode

With this mode, the original image is enlarged/reduced automatically according to the selected paper size.

IMPORTANT!

If you use this mode most often, select “AMS” under “Default magnification ratio” on page 7-50.

2 Select the size of paper that you want to copy onto by touching the appropriate paper size key.

Touch the “AMS” key. The corresponding magnification ratio will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

8

1

/

2 x11"

Color

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge


Ready to copy.

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size Set

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

3 Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.

1 Set the original to be copied.

The copier will automatically detect the size of the originals and select copy paper of that same size.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

11x8

1

/

2

"

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

"

Color

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

"

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge


Ready to copy.

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size Set

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

4-5


(2) Zoom mode

With this mode, the magnification ratio can be set to any 1% increment between 25% and 400% (between 25% and 200% when using the Document Processor).

25%

400%


2 Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key. The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

11x8

1

/

2

"

Color

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge


Ready to copy.

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size Set

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

3 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the displayed magnification ratio to the desired setting.

* The desired magnification ratio can also be entered directly by touching the “#keys” key and then using the keypad.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

100%

Back

Set

Close Register

(25~400)

100 %

# Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"

➔

11x17"

154%

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

" ➔ 8 1 /

2 x14"

129%

8 1 /

2 x11" ➔ 11x17"

121%

8 1 /

2 x14"

➔

11x17"

78%

8 1 /

2 x14"

➔

8 1 /

2 x11"

77%

11x17" ➔ 8 1 /

2 x14"

64%

11x17" ➔ 8 1 /

2 x11"

50%

11x17"

➔

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"

25%


Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Register

Paper size

Back

100%

Set

Close

(25~400)

100 %

#-Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

A 5 ➔ A 3

141% A 4 ➔ A3

A 5

➔

A4

127%

106%

11x15" ➔ A3

90%

Folio ➔ A3

Folio ➔ A4

75%

70%

50%

25%

11x15"

➔

A 4

A3

➔

A4

A4 ➔ A5


Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Paper size

100%

Back

Set

Close Register

(25~400)

100 %

#-Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

A 5 ➔ A 3

141%

122%

115%

86%

A 4 ➔ A 3

B 5 ➔ B 4

A 4

➔

B 4

A 5 ➔ B 5

B 4

➔

A 3

B 5 ➔ A 4

A 3

➔

B 4

A 4 ➔ B 5

81%

70%

50%

25%

B 4 ➔ A 4

B 5

➔

A 5

A 3 ➔ A 4

B 4 ➔ B 5


4-6

(3) Preset zoom mode

With this mode, the magnification ratio can be set to one of the preset ratios:

[Available magnification ratios]

Inch specification

Reduction 25%

50% (11" x 17" R 5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

")

64% (11" x 17" R 8

1/2

" x 11")

77% (11" x 17" R 8

1/2

" x 14")

78% (8

1/2

" x 14" R 8

1/2

" x 11")

Enlargement 121% (8

1/2

" x 14" R 11" x 17")

129% (8

1/2

" x 11" R 11" x 17")

154% (5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

" R 8

1/2

" x 14")

200% (5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

" R 11" x 17")

400%

Metric specification

Reduction 25%

50%

70% (A3 R A4, A4 R A5)

75% (11" x 15" R A4)

90% (Folio R A4)

Enlargement 106% (11" x 15" R A3)

127% (Folio R A3)

141% (A4 R A3, A5 R A4)

200% (A5 R A3)

400%

Metric specification (Asia Pacific)

Reduction 25%

50%

70% (A3 R A4, B4 R B5)

81% (B4 R A4, B5 R A5)

86% (A3 R B4, A4 R B5)

Enlargement 115% (B4 R A3, B5 R A4)

122% (A4 R B4, A5 R B5)

141% (A4 R A3, B5 R B4)

200% (A5 R A3)

400%


2 Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key.

The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

11x8

1

/

2

"

Color

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge


Ready to copy.

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size Set

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge


3 Touch the preset zoom key that corresponds to the magnification ratio that you want to use.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

100%

Back

Set

Close Register

(25~400)

100 %

# Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

5

1

/

2 x8

1

/

2

" ➔ 11x17"

154%

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

" ➔ 8 1 /

2 x14"

129%

8 1 /

2 x11"

➔

11x17"

121%

8 1 /

2 x14"

➔

11x17"

78%

8

1

/

2 x14" ➔ 8

1

/

2 x11"

77%

11x17" ➔ 8 1 /

2 x14"

64%

11x17"

➔

8 1 /

2 x11"

50%

11x17"

➔

25%

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"


Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Register

Paper size

Back

100%

Set

Close

(25~400)

100 %

#-Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

A 5 ➔ A 3

141% A 4

➔

A 5

➔

A3

A4

127%

Folio ➔ A3

106%

11x15"

➔

A3

90%

Folio ➔ A4

75%

70%

50%

25%

11x15"

➔

A 4

A3

➔

A4

A4 ➔ A5


Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Paper size

Back

100%

Set

Close Register

(25~400)

100 %

#-Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

A 5 ➔ A 3

141%

122%

115%

86%

A 4 ➔ A 3

B 5

➔

B 4

A 4 ➔ B 4

A 5 ➔ B 5

B 4 ➔ A 3

B 5 ➔ A 4

A 3 ➔ B 4

A 4 ➔ B 5

81%

70%

50%

25%

B 4

➔

B 5

➔

A 4

A 5

A 3

➔

A 4

B 4 ➔ B 5

NOTE

You can also change the magnification ratio in 1% increments by touching the “+” key or the “-” key, as appropriate.


4-7

4-8


(4) XY zoom mode

With this mode, it is possible for you to select the length and width of the copy image separately. The magnification ratio can be set to any

1% increment between 25% and 400% (between 25% and 200% when using the Document Processor).

M M

Y %

X %

1 Set the originals to be copied.

2 Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key.

The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

"

Color

11x8

1

/

2

"

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge


Ready to copy.

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size Set

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

3 Touch the “XY zoom” key.

The screen to select the magnification ratio will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

100%

Back

Set

Close Register

(25~400)

100 %

# Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"

➔

11x17"

154%

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

" ➔ 8 1 /

2 x14"

129%

8 1 /

2 x11" ➔ 11x17"

121%

8 1 /

2 x14" ➔ 11x17"

78%

8 1 /

2 x14"

➔

8 1 /

2 x11"

77%

11x17" ➔ 8

64%

11x17" ➔ 8

25%

1 /

2 x14"

1 /

2 x11"

50%

11x17" ➔ 5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"


Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Register

Paper size

100%

Back

Set

Close

(25~400)

100 %

#-Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

A 5 ➔ A 3

141% A 4 ➔ A3

A 5

➔

A4

127%

106%

11x15" ➔ A3

90%

Folio ➔ A3

Folio ➔ A4

75%

70%

11x15" ➔ A 4

A3

➔

A4

A4 ➔ A5

50%

25%


Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

Paper size

Back

100%

Set

Close Register

(25~400)

100 %

#-Keys

AMS

100%

400%

200%

A 5

➔

A 3

141%

122%

115%

86%

A 4

➔

A 3

B 5 ➔ B 4

A 4 ➔ B 4

A 5 ➔ B 5

B 4 ➔ A 3

B 5

➔

A 4

A 3 ➔ B 4

A 4

➔

B 5

81%

70%

50%

25%

B 4

➔

A 4

B 5 ➔ A 5

A 3 ➔ A 4

B 4 ➔ B 5

4 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key, as appropriate, specify the desired magnification ratio for the width and then the length of the image. It is also possible for you to enter the desired ratio directly by touching the corresponding “#keys” key and then using the keypad.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge y

Standard

Zoom xy zoom

+

# keys

Register x

+

# keys

Paper Size

Y

11x8

1 /

2

"

X

Set

Back

C h e ck d i r e c t i o n

C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f o r i g i n a l t o p s i d e.

Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Reduce/Enlarge

Y

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

#-Keys

X

Register

Paper size Set

Y: X:

Back


C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f o r i g i n a l .

Close

#-Keys Back Edge

Left top corner

5 Touch the appropriate key on the right side of the touch panel to specify the direction in which the original was set.


3. Interrupt copying

Interrupt copying is useful if, during one copy job, you want to copy other originals at different settings. Once the rush job is completed, the interrupted copy job can be resumed at the same settings as before.

1 2 3 A

1 2 A 3

1 Press the [Interrupt] key to light the lamp in the [Interrupt] key. “Interrupt mode OK” will be displayed.


4 When copying is completed, press the [Interrupt] key once again, and replace the newly copied originals with the ones removed before. Then, press the [Start] key. The interrupted copy job will be resumed.

2 Remove the originals that were currently being copied and put them aside.

3 Set the new originals and perform the desired copy procedure.

4-9


4. Job reservation

Copy jobs can be scheduled even while another copy job is in progress any time the “Reserve next copy” key is displayed.

Inch specifications

Now copying.

O r i g . p a g e

12

11x8 1 /

2

"

1 sided

Rear

100%

APS

C o u n t / S e t

1/999

11x8 1 /

2

"

1 sided

Sort

O u t p u t

Memory usage 30%

Reserve next copy

Pause


Now copying.

O r i g i n a l

12

1-sided

Rear

100%

APS 1-sided

Sort

C o u n t / s e t

1/999

O u t p u t

Reserve next copy

Stop

/Change

You can enter the corresponding copy settings and scan in the originals in preparation for your copy job even before the other job is completed.

Once that job is finished and print out is possible, the operation for the reserved job will begin automatically.

1 Touch the “Reserve next copy” key.

The “Ready to copy. (Job reservation)” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Memory usage 30%

Now copying.

O u t p u t

O r i g . p a g e

11x8

1

/

2

"

1 sided

Rear

12

100%

APS

C o u n t / S e t

1/999

11x8

1

/

2

"

1 sided

Sort

Reserve next copy

Pause

NOTE

Job reservation is not available any time the “Reserve next copy” key is grayed out or when it isn't displayed at all.


3 Select the settings and functions that you want to use for that copy job.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy. (Job reservation)

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

"

11x8

1 /

Color

2

"

11x8

Plain

1

/

2

"

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge

Finish Job res.


Ready to copy. (Jobreservation)

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size Set

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

Job resrv.

finished

4 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start.

Once all of the originals have been completely scanned, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.


Now copying.

O r i g i n a l

12

1-sided

Rear

100%

APS 1-sided

Sort

C o u n t / s e t

1/999

O u t p u t

Reserve next copy

Stop

/Change

4-10

5. Energy-saving preheat function

If you press the [Energy Saver] key, even while the main switch is still turned ON, the copier will enter the energy-saving preheat mode.

When the copier is in this preheat mode, the light the lamp in the

[Energy Saver] key will be the only lit indication on the operation panel.

To resume copying after the preheat function has been activated, press the [Energy Saver] key once again.

It will take the copier less than 30 seconds to return to a copy-ready state.


6. Auto shut-off function

This function automatically turns the main switch OFF ( O ) if no operation has been performed on the copier for a certain period of time (15 to 240 minutes). When you want to make copies again, simply turn the main switch back ON ( | ).

* The factory default setting is for the auto shut-off function to engage after 90 minutes.

●

More about the auto shut-off function

The auto shut-off function is a power-saving feature which automatically turns the main switch to the copier OFF ( O ) when a certain time elapses without any operation being performed.

Copiers are generally in a standby mode more than they are in actual operation, so power consumption in the standby mode occupies a large part of overall consumption. Having the copier turned OFF ( O ) automatically after a certain amount of time reduces unnecessary power consumption in the standby mode or at night if the copier happens to be left on accidentally. The result is a lower electricity bill.

NOTE

The energy-saving preheat mode will also engage automatically in this copier if no operation is performed for a predetermined period of time. (See “Auto preheat time” on page 7-28.)

NOTES

• In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the auto shut-off function engages, see “Auto shut-off time” on page 7-27. In order to disable the auto shut-off function, see “Auto shut-off ON/OFF” on page 7-35.

• If the optional Printer kit is installed in your copier, the copier will enter the sleep mode whenever the auto shut-off function engages.

In this state, when the copier detects data for a print job, it will automatically recover to a print-ready state and printout of the corresponding information will begin.

4-11


4-12

Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS

1. Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals [2-sided copy modes]

With these modes, 2-sided copies can be made from a variety of originals including open-faced (books, etc.) or 2-sided originals.

(1) Making 2-sided copies from a 2-sided original

With this mode, a 2-sided original is copied and the front and back sides of the copy paper are used so that the copy looks just like the original.

(2) Making 2-sided copies from an open-faced (books, etc.) original

With this mode, the two facing pages of a book or magazine are copied separately onto the front and back sides of the copy paper by simply pressing the [Start] key.

<Original>

“Left/Right”

1

2

<Finished copy>

“Left/Right”

1

2

<Original>

“Left”

1 2

<Finished copy>

“Book / Duplex”

1

2

“Left/Right”

1

2

1

“Top”

2

1

“Left”

2

“Book / Book”

0

1 2

3

“Top”

1

2

“Left/Right”

1

2

“Right”

2 1

“Book / Duplex”

1

2

“Book / Book”

“Right”

2 1 “Top”

1

2

1

“Top”

2

3

2 1

0

IMPORTANT!


Only paper sizes between 11" x 17" and 5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

" can be used in this mode.


Only paper sizes between A5R and A3 can be used in this mode.

IMPORTANT!


Only 11" x 17" and 8

1/2

" x 11" size originals can be used in this mode.


Only A5R, A4R and A3 size originals can be used in this mode.

• Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)

Only A5R, B5R, A4R, B4 and A3 size originals can be used in this mode.

5-1


(3) Making 2-sided copies from one-sided originals

With this mode, multiple one-sided originals are copied onto the front and back sides of the copy paper. If you are copying an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy page will be blank.

1

2

3

4

5

2

4

1

3

5

NOTE

The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies can also be rotated 180 degrees.

1 If you chose the “Left/Right” [“Left/Right binding”] setting for finished copies:

The back side of the copies will be created with the same orientation as the originals.

2 If you chose the “Top” [“Top binding”] setting for finished copies:

The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies will be rotated 180 degrees. If you then bind the copy set at the top, the images will be oriented in the same direction when flipped up like a calendar, etc.

abc def ghi abc ghi def abc ghi def


2 Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab will be displayed.

Touch the “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] key.

The “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

3 If you are copying from 2-sided originals, touch the

“2 sided / 2 sided” key. If you are copying from open-faced originals, touch the “Book / 2 sided” key. If you are copying from 1-sided originals, touch the “1 sided / 2 sided” key.

If you selected “2 sided / 2 sided” or “Book / 2 sided”, go to the next step. If you selected “1 sided / 2 sided”, go directly to step 5.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

2 sided/Separation Register

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back Close

1 sided

➔

1 sided

2 sided

➔

1 sided

Book

➔ 1 sided

1 sided

➔

2 sided

2 sided

➔

2 sided

Book

➔ 2 sided

Able to copy 1 sided (separate) or

2 sided copy using 1 sided original,

Book original or 2 sided original.


Ready to copy.

2-sided / Split

1-sided

R 1-sided

2-sided

R 1-sided

Book

R 1-sided

1-sided

R 2-sided

2-sided

R 2-sided

Book

R 2-sided

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

A bl e t o c o py 1 - s i d e d ( s e p a ra t e ) o r

2 - s i d e d c o py u s i n g 1 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l , b o o k o r i g i n a l o r 2 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l .

5-2

4 Specify the binding direction of the originals.

Inch specifications

<for 2-sided originals> to copy.

<for open-faced originals> to copy.

ion

Original

Register

Finished ion

Original

Register

Finished

1 sided

➔ 2 sided

2 sided

➔ 2 sided

Book

➔

2 sided

Open from left/right

Open from top


Open from top

1 sided

➔

2 sided

2 sided

➔

2 sided

Book

➔

2 sided

Open from left

Open from right

Book

➔

Duplex

Book ➔

Book


<for 2-sided originals> to copy.

O r i g i n a l

Register

F i n i s h e d


O r i g i n a l

Register

F i n i s h e d

1-sided

R 2-sided

2-sided

R 2-sided

Book

R 2-sided

Left/Right binding

Top binding

Left/Right binding

Top binding

1-sided

R 2-sided

2-sided

R 2-sided

Book

R 2-sided

Left binding

Right binding

Book R

Duplex

Book R

Book

5 Select the binding direction you want for the finished copies.

Inch specifications

<for 1-sided or 2-sided originals> <for open-faced originals>

Paper siz

11x opy.

Original


Open from top

Register

Finished


Open from top

Back

Check direction

Check direction original top side

Rear d d d

Original

Open from left

Open from right

Register

Finished

Book ➔

Duplex

Book

➔

Book

Bac

Check

Set t top s



Paper s copy.

O r i g i n a l

Left/Right binding

Top binding

Register

F i n i s h e d

Left/Right binding

Top binding

Back

C h e ck d i r e c

C h e ck d i r e

o r i g i n a l .

d d

Back Edge ed

O r i g i n a l

Left binding

Right binding

Register

F i n i s h e d

Book R

Duplex

Book R

Book

Ba

C h e

S e s i d


6 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set.

IMPORTANT!

If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.

Inch specifications


Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Paper size Set

Register

Finished

Back

Check direction

Check direction of original top side.

Close

Register

F i n i s h e d

Back Close


S e t b o o k o r i g i n a l t o p s i d e d i r e c t i o n t o b a ck .


Open from top

Book R

Duplex

Book R

Book

Rear

Left top corner



Paper size Set

Paper size Set

Register

F i n i s h e d

Back Close


C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o f

o r i g i n a l .

Register

F i n i s h e d

Back Close



Left/Right binding

Top binding

Book R

Duplex

Book R

Book

Back Edge

Left top

Corner

7 Press the [Start] key.

Scanning of the originals will start.

If you set the originals in the Document Processor, copying will start automatically.

If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next step.

8 Replace the first original with the next one and press the

[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.

9 Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.

5-3


2. Copying two-page originals onto separate sheets

[Page separation/Split copy modes]


(1) Page separation/Split copy from book originals

With this mode, the two facing pages of an open-faced original such as a book, a magazine, and the like are each copied onto a separate sheet of paper.

12

21

1 2

1 2

IMPORTANT!

Inch specifications

• Only 11" x 17" and 8

1/2

" x 11" size originals and 11" x 8

1/2

" size copy paper can be used in this mode. Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper.


• Only A3 size originals and A4 size copy paper can be used in this mode.


• Only A3, B4, A4R, B5R and A5R size originals and A4 or B5 size copy paper can be used in this mode. Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper.


3 Touch the “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] key.

The “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

(2) Page separation/Split copy from 2-sided originals

With this mode, the two sides of a 2-sided original are each copied onto a separate sheet of paper.

2 1 1 2

2

1 1 2

5-4

4 Touch the “2 sided / 1 sided” key or the “Book / 2 sided” key, as appropriate to the type of originals being copied and the type of finished copies to be made.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

2 sided/Separation Register

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back Close

1 sided

➔

1 sided

2 sided

➔

1 sided

Book

➔ 1 sided

1 sided

➔

2 sided

2 sided

➔

2 sided

Book

➔ 2 sided


Ready to copy.

2-sided / Split

1-sided

R 1-sided

2-sided

R 1-sided

Book

R 1-sided

1-sided

R 2-sided

2-sided

R 2-sided

Book

R 2-sided

Able to copy 1 sided (separate) or

2 sided copy using 1 sided original,

Book original or 2 sided original.

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

A bl e t o c o py 1 - s i d e d ( s e p a ra t e ) o r

2 - s i d e d c o py u s i n g 1 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l , b o o k o r i g i n a l o r 2 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l .

5 Specify the binding direction of the originals.

Inch specifications

<for 2-sided originals> ady to copy.


Separation Registe on Register

Original Original d d d

1 sided

➔ 2 sided

2 sided

➔ 2 sided

Book

➔ 2 sided


Open from top

1 sided

➔

2 sided

2 sided

➔

2 sided

Book

➔ 2 sided

Open from left

Open from right


<for 2-sided originals>

Ready to copy.

ided / Split

O r i g i n a l

R


Register

O r i g i n a l ed sided ed sided k sided

1-sided

R 2-sided

2-sided

R 2-sided

Book

R 2-sided

Left/Right binding

Top binding

-sided

R 2-sided

-sided

R 2-sided

Book

R 2-sided

Left binding

Right binding



IMPORTANT!


Inch specifications


Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Register Back

Check direction


Close Register Back Close

Check direction

Set the book original top side direct to back.

Rear

Left top corner



Paper size Set Paper size Set

Register Back



o r i g i n a l .

Close

Register Back Close



Back Edge

Left top corner

7 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start.






5-5


3. Making a margin space on the copies [Margin mode]

(1) Standard margin

Inch specifications

The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or down to make a margin (blank) space on the copy. The width of each margin can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 3/4".

A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.


The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or down to make a margin (blank) space on the copy. The width of each margin can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm.


(2) Separate front and back margin settings

Inch specifications

When you are making 2-sided copies, the margin positions and widths can be selected separately for the front and back sides. The width of each margin can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 3/4".



When you are making 2-sided copies, the margin positions and widths can be selected separately for the front and back sides. The width of each margin can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm. A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.

A

B

B

A

NOTES

• It is also possible for you to select the default setting for the location and width of the margins. (See “Margin width” on page 7-58.)

• If you select to have a left margin created during 2-sided copying and the location for the back side margin is set to “Auto”, a right margin that is the same width as the margin on the front side will be automatically created on the back side of the copies.


IMPORTANT!

Set originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of the copier. Setting them in the wrong direction may cause the margin to be created in the incorrect position.


3 Touch the “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag.shift”] key.

The “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Image shift”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

5-6

4 Touch the “Margin” key. The screen to set the front side margin will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Margin/Centering Register Back Close

None

Margin

Centering


Ready to copy.

Margin/Image shift

Reposition image to left/right or top/bottom, and also center image on paper.

Register

Paper size

Set

Back Close

None

Margin

Image shift

R e p o s i t i o n i m a g e t o l e f t / r i g h t o r t o p / b o t t o m a n d c e n t e r i m a g e o n p a p e r.

5 Use the up/down and left/right cursor keys to select the desired location and width of each margin.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Margin/Centering

Front page

(0~ 3 /

4

)

0

"

Register Back

Check direction


Close

None

Margin

Centering

Left

(0~

3

/

4

)

1 /

4 "

Au t o

Back page margin

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Margin/Image shift

Fr o n t p a g e

None

Margin

Image shift

Left

Register

Au t o

Back page margin

Paper size Set

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

6 If you are making 2-sided copies, touch the “Back page margin” key. The “Back page margin” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Margin/Centering

Front page

Top

(0~ 3 /

4

)

1 /

4 "

Register

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

None

Margin

Centering

Left

(0~ 3 /

4

)

1 /

2 "

Au t o

Back page margin

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Margin/Image shift

Fr o n t p a g e

Top

None

Margin

Image shift

Left

Register

Au t o

Back page margin

Paper size Set

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner


7 If you want to create a margin on the back side of the copies that lines up with that on the front side, touch the “Auto” key.

If you want to set the margins for the front and back sides separately, touch the “Front/Back margin” key. The screen to set the back side margin will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Back page margin

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Auto

Front/Back margin

If "AUTO" is selected for duplex copying, rear will have same margin setting as that for the front page.

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Back page margin

Paper size Set

Back



Close

Auto

Front/Back margin

I f " AU TO " i s s e l e c t e d a t t h e d u p l ex c o py i n g , b a ck s i d e w i l l h ave s a m e m a r g i n s e t t i n g a s t h a t fo r t h e f r o n t p a g e.

Back Edge

Left top corner

8 Use the up/down and left/right cursor keys to select the desired location and width of each margin.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Back page margin

Back page

(0~

3

/

4

)

0

"

Back

Check direction


Close

Auto

Front/Back margin

(0~ 3 /

4

)

0

"

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Back page margin

B a ck p a g e

Paper size Set

Back



Close

Auto

Front/Back margin

Back Edge

Left top corner


IMPORTANT!



Copying will start.

5-7


4. Centering the copy image [Centering/Image shift mode]

With this mode you can center the image on the copy paper when you copy onto a paper size that is larger than that of the original.

4 Touch the “Centering” [“Imag.shift”] key. The “Centering”

[“Imag.shift”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Margin/Centering Register Back Close

None

Margin

Centering


Ready to copy.

Margin/Image shift


Register

Paper size Set

Back Close


IMPORTANT!

Set originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of the copier. Setting them in the wrong direction may cause the image to be copied in the incorrect position.

None

Margin

Image shift

R e p o s i t i o n i m a g e t o l e f t / r i g h t o r t o p / b o t t o m a n d c e n t e r i m a g e o n p a p e r.


3 Touch the “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag.shift”] key. The

“Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Image shift”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down


Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Margin/Centering Register

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

None

Margin

Centering

Able to center scanned image on paper.

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Margin/Image shift Register

Paper size

Set

Back



Close

None

Margin

Image shift

A bl e t o c e n t e r s c a n n e d i m a g e o n p a p e r.

Back Edge

Left top corner

IMPORTANT!



Copying will start.

5-8


5. Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes [Memo mode]

With this mode you can leave a space for adding notes next to the copied image. It is also possible to fit the images of 2 originals onto the same copy page along with a blank space for each.

●

Copying one original onto one copy page (layout A)

1

2

Set the originals to be copied.

Touch the “Function” tab and then the “ N Down” key.

The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be displayed.

●

Copying two originals onto one copy page (layout B)

3 Touch the “Memo pages” key. The “Memo pages” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror Up

Down



Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert


Program

Memo pages

Mirror

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

NOTE

Only originals and copy paper of standard sizes can be used in this mode.

4 Touch the “Layout A” key or the “Layout B” key, as appropriate. The screen to make the layout settings will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Memo pages

None

Layout A

Layout B

Layout

Register

Border line

None

Solid

Dotted

Borders

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

50%

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Memo pages

Layout

None

Layout A

Layout B

Paper size Set

Register

Border line

None

Solid

Dotted

Cropmark

Back Close



Back Edge

Left top corner

5-9


5 Select the desired direction of the layout.

Inch specifications

<Layout A> <Layout B> to copy.

to copy.

Layout

Register

Border line

None

Solid

Dotted

Borders

Layout

Register

Border line

None

Solid

Dotted

Borders


<Layout A> to copy.

Layout

Register

Border line

None

Solid

Dotted

Cropmark to copy.

<Layout B>

Layout

Register

Border line

None

Solid

Dotted

Cropmark

6 Select the type of the borderline that you want to use to separate the different areas.








5-10


6. Making copies with clean edges [Border erase modes]

(1) Erasing blemishes from edges of copies (Sheet erase mode)

Inch specifications

With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of copies made from sheet originals can be erased. The width of the border to be erased can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 3/4". A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.

(The width of the border that will be erased is shown as a in the illustration.)


With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of copies made from sheet originals can be erased. The width of the border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm. A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.

(The width of the border that will be erased is shown as a in the illustration.)

(2) Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of copies made from books (Book erase mode)

Inch specifications

With this mode, you can make clean copies, even from thick books.

The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 3/4". The width of the center area to be erased can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 1 1/2".

A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased. (The width of the outside border that will be erased is shown as a in the illustration, while the width of the center area is shown as b .)


With this mode, you can make clean copies, even from thick books.

The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm. The width of the center area to be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and

36 mm. A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.

(The width of the outside border that will be erased is shown as a in the illustration, while the width of the center area is shown as b .) a a a abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk b a abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk

NOTE

It is possible for you to change the default setting for the width of the erased border. (See “Erased border width” on page 7-59.)

NOTE

It is possible for you to change the default setting for the width of the erased borders. (See “Erased border width” on page 7-59.)

5-11




3 Touch the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key. The “Border

Erase” [“Erase Mode”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

4 Touch the “Sheet Erase” [“Border erase”] key or the “Book

Erase” key, as appropriate. The screen to set the outside border and the center area will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Border Erase Register Back Close

Erase the border shadow of original or shadow from centor of book.

None

Sheet

Erase

Book

Erase


Ready to copy.

Erase Mode Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

None

Border erase

Book erase

E ra s e e d g e o f o r i g i n a l o r c e n t e r o f b o o k a n d c o py.

5 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the displayed border width to that desired.

* In metric specification copiers, the desired border width can also be entered directly by touching the “#keys” key and then using the keypad.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Border Erase

Border

(0~1 3 /

4

)

1 /

4 "

+

Center

Register

(0~1

1

/

2

)

1 /

2 "

+ None

Sheet

Erase

Book

Erase

Back Close


Ready to copy.

Erase Mode

B o r d e r

6

C e n t e r

None

Border erase

Book erase

#-Keys #-Keys

Register

12

Paper size Set

Back Close


Copying will start.

5-12


7. Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page

[Combine/Merge Copy modes]

With this mode, the images from either 2 or 4 originals can be reduced and then combined onto a single copy. The borderline of each original can also be marked with either a solid line or a dotted line.

(2) 4 in 1

Use this mode when you want to copy four originals onto one sheet.

This mode can also be used in conjunction with the 2-sided copy modes in order to copy eight originals onto one sheet.

(When setting the originals on the platen, be sure to set the originals in the correct order: 1, 2, 3 and then 4.)

1 2

3 4

NOTE

Only originals and copy paper of standard sizes can be used in this mode.

1

2

3

4

2 1

4 3

1 3

2 4

3 1

4 2

(1) 2 in 1

Use this mode when you want to copy two originals onto one sheet.

This mode can also be used in conjunction with the 2-sided copy modes in order to copy four originals onto one sheet.

(When setting the originals on the platen, be sure to set the originals in the correct order: 1 and then 2.)

1

2

1 2

2 1

2

1

1

2

5-13




Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

"

11x8

Color

1 /

2

"

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

"

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge


Ready to copy.

Paper Size Set

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

3 Touch the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key. The “Combine”

[“Merge copy”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

4 Touch the “2 in 1” key or the “4 in 1” key, as appropriate.

The screen to make the layout settings will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Combine Register Back Close

None 2 or 4 original pages can combine on one page.


Ready to copy.

Merge copy

None

2-in-1

4-in-1

Register

Paper size

Set

Back Close

2 o r 4 o r i g i n a l s c a n b e p r i n t e d o n o n e p a g e.

5 Select the desired direction of the layout.

Inch specifications to copy.

to copy.

Layout

Register

Border line

None

Solid

Dotted

Borders

Layout

Metric specifications to copy.

L ayo u t

Register

B o r d e r l i n e

None

Solid

Dotted

Cropmark to copy.

L ayo u t

Register

Border line

None

Solid

Dotted

Borders

Register

B o r d e r l i n e

None

Solid

Dotted

Cropmark

6 Select the type of the borderline that you want to use to separate the images.

5-14









5-15


8. Printing page numbers on copies [Print page numbers mode]

When you make copies from multiple originals, you can have page numbers printed on the corresponding copies in numerical order from the first original. There are three styles of page numbers to choose from: “-1-”, “P.1” and “1/n”.

* If you select “1/n” as the style of page numbers, the denominator will indicate the total number of pages.

3 Touch the “Page #” [“Page numbering”] key. The “Page #”

[“Page numbering”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down

A

B

C

D

E

A

B

C

D

E

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-5-

A

B

C

D

E

-1-

-2-

A

B

C

D

E

-1-

-2-

-3-

A

B

C

P.1

P.2

P.3

P.4

P.5

D

E

A

B

C

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

D

E

4


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

Touch the key that corresponds to the style of page numbers that you want to use. The screen to make settings for that style will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Page # Register Back Close

None Page # can be added on bottom of copy.

NOTE

Page numbers will be printed relative to the middle of the bottom of the page. (The arrow in the illustration indicates the direction in which the originals are set.)

Abcde

-1-

Abcde


Ready to copy.

Page numbering

None

-1-

P.1

1/n

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

Pa g e # c a n b e a d d e d o n b o t t o m o f c o py.

-1-



5-16

5 If you want printing of the page numbers to be started from a page other than the first page, touch the “Setting 1st page” key.

The “Setting 1st page” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Page #

None

Start page #

Setting

1st page

Finish Page #

Last page

Setting last page

Register

Start #

Setting start #

Denominator #

Auto

Set denominator #

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Paper size

Set

Page numbering

None

-1-

P.1

1/n

S t a r t p a g e #

1

Setting

1st page

L a s t p a g e #

L a s t p a g e

Setting last page

Register

S t a r t #

1

Setting start page

Denominator #

Au t o

Set

Denomin. #

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

6 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select from which page printing of the page numbers will start.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Setting 1st page

Page

Back

Check direction


Close

+

Left top corner

Rear


Ready to copy.

Setting 1st page

Pa g e

Paper size

Set

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

7 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 5.


8 If you want the first page number that is printed to be something other than “1”, touch the “Setting start #” [“Setting

Start page”] key. The “Setting start #” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Page #

None

Start page #

Setting

1st page

Finish Page #

Last page

Setting last page

Register

Start #

Setting start #

Denominator #

Auto

Set denominator #

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Page numbering

None

-1-

P.1

1/n

Paper size

Set

S t a r t p a g e #

1

Setting

1st page

L a s t p a g e #

L a s t p a g e

Setting last page

Register

S t a r t #

1

Setting start page

Denominator #

Au t o

Set

Denomin. #

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

9 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the first page number that will be printed.

* The desired page number can also be entered directly by touching the “#keys” key and then using the keypad.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Setting start #

Paper size

8 1 /

2 x11"

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

+

Left top corner

# keys Rear


Ready to copy.

Setting start #

Paper size

Set

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner #-Keys


5-17


11 If you want the last page number that is printed to be on a copy other than that for the last original, touch the “Setting last page” key. The “Setting last page” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Page #

None

Start page #

Setting

1st page

Finish Page #

Last page

Setting last page

Register

Start #

Setting start #

Denominator #

Auto

Set denominator #

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Paper size Set

Page numbering

None

-1-

P.1

1/n

S t a r t p a g e #

1

Setting

1st page

L a s t p a g e #

L a s t p a g e

Setting last page

Register

S t a r t #

1

Setting start page

Denominator #

Au t o

Set

Denomin. #

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

12 Touch the “Manual” key.

The screen to designate the last page will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Setting last page Back

Check direction


Close

Last page

Manual

Left top corner

Rear


Ready to copy.

Setting last page

Paper size

Set

Back



Close

Last page

Manual

Back Edge

Left top corner

13 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select, counting from the final copy, how many pages you do NOT want to have page numbers printed on.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Setting last page

Last page

Manual

+

Page

Back

Check direction


Close

Left top corner

Rear


Ready to copy.

Setting last page

Last page

Manual

Pa g e

Paper size Set

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner


If you selected the “1/n” style, the “Set denominator #”

[“Set Denomin. #”] key will be displayed.

15 If you want to manually select the denominator for the page numbers, touch the “Set denominator #” [“Set Denomin. #”] key. The “Setting denominator #” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Page #

None

Start page #

Setting

1st page

Finish Page #

Last page

Setting last page

Register

Start #

Setting start #

Denominator #

Auto

Set denominator #

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Page numbering

None

-1-

P.1

1/n

Paper size Set

S t a r t p a g e #

1

Setting

1st page

L a s t p a g e #

L a s t p a g e

Setting last page

Register

S t a r t #

1

Setting start page

Denominator #

Au t o

Set

Denomin. #

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

5-18

16 Touch the “Manual” key.

The screen to designate the denominator will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Setting denominator # Back

Check direction


Close

Auto

Manual

Left top corner

Rear


Ready to copy.

Setting denominator #

Paper size

Set

Back



Close

Auto

Manual

Back Edge

Left top corner

17 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the desired denominator for the page numbers.

* The desired denominator can also be entered directly by touching the “#keys” key and then using the keypad.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

8

1

/

2 x11"

Set


Auto

Manual

+

Back

Check direction


Close

Left top corner

# keys Rear


Ready to copy.


Auto

Manual

#-Keys

Paper size

Set

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner



Inch specifications

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Register

Finished

Back

Check direction


Close Register

Finished

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back Close

Check direction



Open from top

Book

➔

Duplex

Book ➔

Book

Left top corner

Rear


Paper size Set

Register

F i n i s h e d

Back Close



o r i g i n a l .

Left/Right binding

Top binding

Back Edge

Left top

Corner

Register

F i n i s h e d

Book R

Duplex

Book R

Book

Paper size Set

Back Close




Copying will start.

5-19


9. Overlaying one image over another [Form overlay mode]

This mode can be used to scan the first original (the “form”) into memory and have its image overlaid onto copies made from subsequent originals. It is also possible to register and store in memory, in advance, the images that you want to use as original forms.

3 Touch the “On” key.

The screen to set the shading level of the form image will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Forms Overlay Register

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back Close

Off

On

Use the first scanned image as a form for copy after second original image.

A

B

C

A

B

C


Ready to copy.

Form overlay

Of

On

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

1 s t s c a n n e d i m a g e c a n b e u s e d a s a fo r m fo r c o py a f t e r s e c o n d o r i g i n a l i m a g e.

NOTE

Refer to “(2) Form registration” on page 6-1 for the procedure to register images as forms.


2 Touch the “Forms Overlay”[“Form overlay”] key. The “Forms

Overlay”[“Form overlay”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

4 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the level of shading that you want to use for the original form.

The desired shading level can be set to any 10% increment between 10% and 100%.

* A sample of the effect that the selected shading level will produce will be displayed to the right of the entry field.

Inch specifications

Place from first then press start.

Forms Overlay

Exposure

(10~100)

50

%

Off

On

Register Back Close

Scan form once

Form

Selected


Set form.

Press Start Key.

Form overlay

Exposure

(10 100)

50 %

Off

On

Register Back Close

Scan form once

Form selection

5 If you want to use a previously registered image as the form, touch the “Form Selected” [“Form selection”] key and go to the next step.

If you want to scan in a new image, go directly to step 9.

5-20

6 Touch the “Loading Form” key.

A list of registered forms will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select Form Back Close

Scan form once

Loading

Form

Overlay first scanned image onto the scanned image or on registered from.

Metric specifications y

Press Start key.

Form selection

Scan form once

Loading

Form

Back

Paper size Set

Close

Back Close

Overlay 1st image on the scanned image or on registered form.

7 Select from that list the image that you want to use and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.

Inch specifications

Select Form

Scan form once

Loading

Form

Back

Form

Form 005

Form 004

Form 003

Form 002

Form 001

11x8 1 /

2

"

11x8 1 /

2

"

8 1 /

2 x11"

11x8 1 /

2

"

11x8 1 /

2

"

1200dpi

The arrow means direction of registered form.

Set original and form directions.

Up

Down

Close


Form selection

Scan form once

Loading

Form

Form

Form006

Form005

Form004

Form003

Form002

The arrow means direction of registered form.

Set original and form directions.

Back

Up

Down

Close

8 Set the originals that you want to copy and go directly to step

10.


9 If you are using the Document Processor, make sure that the original that you want to use as the form is on top of the originals that you want to copy.

If you are using the platen, set the original that you want to use as the form.


Copying will start.

If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go to the next step.




5-21


10. Making booklets from sheet originals [Booklet/Stitching mode]

With this mode, you can use 1-sided or 2-sided originals to make open-faced, two-sided copies in such a way that the finished copies can be stacked and folded into a booklet format. You can also select to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and/or back covers to the copy sets.

3 If “Top” is selected as the binding direction...

Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the finished copies read from top to bottom.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

NOTES

Inch specifications

• Only 11" x 8

1/2

", 8

1/2

" x 11" and 11" x 17" size copy paper can be used in this mode.

• If the optional Document Finisher is is installed on your copier, you will be able to select center stapling. If the optional Center-Folding

Unit is installed as well, you will be able to center fold those stapled sets. Only 11" x 17" and 8

1/2

" x 11" size copy paper can be center folded and stapled.

• It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on page 7-49.)


• Only A3, B4, A4, and A4R size copy paper can be used in this mode.

• If the optional Document Finisher is is installed on your copier, you will be able to select center stapling. If the optional Center-Folding

Unit is installed as well, you will be able to center fold those stapled sets. Only A3, B4, and A4R size copy paper can be center folded and stapled.


4 It is possible for you to select whether or not to copy onto the front and/or back cover sheets.

Front cover Back cover

Do NOT copy

Copy on outside

4

2

3

1

5

6

7

8

Copy on inside a a b b

Copy on both sides

1 If “Left” is selected as the binding direction...

Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the finished copies read from left to right.

2 If “Right” is selected as the binding direction...

Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the finished copies read from right to left.

NOTES

• The asterisk “ ” indicates the side of the cover on which copying will be accomplished.

• The illustrations above are an example of when “Left” is selected as the binding direction.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

1

2

3

4

2

8

7

6

5

6

8

7

5

3

1

2

4

5-22

1 Set the originals to be copied in the Document Processor.

IMPORTANT!

If you are using the platen, be absolutely certain to set the first original first.


3 Touch the “Booklet” key. The “Booklet” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

4 Touch the “Booklet” key. The screen to specify the binding direction of the originals and the finished copies will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Booklet Register Back Close

E d i t o n e o r t wo s i d e d o r i g i n a l p a g e s a n d o u t p u t a b o o k .

U s e B o o k - b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .

None

Booklet

Book

➔

Booklet


Ready to copy.

Booklet

None

Booklet

Book

R Booklet

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

E d i t 1 - a n d 2 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l s a n d o u t p u t a s b o o k .

U s e B o o k R b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .


5 Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the finished copies.

Inch specifications

2 sided mode.

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Booklet

Original Finishing

Register

Stitching

Off

Stitching

Front cvr

Back

Check direction


Close

None

Booklet

Book

➔

Booklet

1-sided

2-sided

Left/Right

2-sided

Top/Bottom

Open from left

Open from right

Open from top

Saddle

Stitch

Rear

Left top corner


Duplex Mode.

Booklet

O r i g i n a l

None

Booklet

Book

R Booklet

1-sided

2-sided

Left/Right

2-sided

Top/Bottom

Left binding

Right binding

Top binding

F i n i s h e d

Register

S t i t c h i n g

O f f

Stitching

Front cov.

Center

Staple

Paper size

Set

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

6 If “It is impossible to copy in present setting mode. Change setting of original and finishing mode.” appears, check (on the right side of the touch panel) whether both the orientation of the originals and the finish mode setting are correct or not.

Inch specifications

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

It is impossible to copy in present setting mode.

Change setting of original and finishing mode.

Booklet

None

Original Finishing

Register

Stitching

Off

Stitching

Front cvr

Booklet

Book

➔ Booklet

1-sided

2-sided

Left/Right

2-sided

Top/Bottom

Open from left

Open from right

Open from top

Saddle

Stitch

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


It is impossible to copy in present setting mode.

Change setting of original and finishing mode.

Booklet

O r i g i n a l F i n i s h e d

Register

S t i t c h i n g

O f f

Stitching

Front cov.

None

Booklet

Book

R Booklet

1-sided

2-sided

Left/Right

2-sided

Top/Bottom

Left binding

Right binding

Top binding

Center

Staple

Paper size

Set

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

5-23


7 If the optional Document Finisher is installed on your copier, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center Staple”] key will be displayed and you will be able to select center stapling.

If the optional Center-Folding Unit is installed as well, you will be able to center fold those stapled sets.

In this case, if you DO want the center stapling operation, or the center stapling and folding operation, to be performed, touch the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center Staple”] key and go to the next step.

If you do NOT want either operation to be performed, go directly to step 9.

Inch specifications

2 sided mode.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Booklet

Original Finishing

Register

Stitching

Off

Stitching

Front cvr

Back

Check direction


Close

None

Booklet

Book

➔

Booklet

1-sided

2-sided

Left/Right

2-sided

Top/Bottom

Open from left

Open from right

Open from top

Saddle

Stitch

Rear

Left top corner


Duplex Mode.

Booklet

O r i g i n a l

None

Booklet

Book

R Booklet

1-sided

2-sided

Left/Right

2-sided

Top/Bottom

Left binding

Right binding

Top binding

F i n i s h e d

Register

S t i t c h i n g

O f f

Stitching

Front cov.

Center

Staple

Paper size

Set

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

8 Touch the “Saddle stitch” key or the “Bind & Fold” key, as appropriate.

* It is possible for you to center staple, or center staple and fold, up to 16 copy sheets (64 layout pages) at one time.

Inch specifications

Set first page.

Press "Start" key.

Saddle Stitch

Pape Set

100%

8

1

/ x11"

Back Close

Off

Saddle stitch

Bind &

Fold


Duplex Mode.

Saddle Stitch

Off

Saddle

Stitch

Bind

& Fold

Paper size Set

Back Close

NOTE

The “Bind & Fold” key will only be displayed when the optional

Center-Folding Unit is installed on your copier.

9 If you want to add covers, touch the “Stitching Front cvr”

[“Stitching Front cov.”] key and go to the next step.

If you do NOT want to add covers, go directly to step 11.

Inch specifications

2 sided mode.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Booklet

Original Finishing

Register

Stitching

Off

Stitching

Front cvr

Back

Check direction


Close

None

Booklet

Book

➔ Booklet

1-sided

2-sided

Left/Right

2-sided

Top/Bottom

Open from left

Open from right

Open from top

Saddle

Stitch

Rear

Left top corner


Duplex Mode.

Booklet

O r i g i n a l

None

Booklet

Book

R Booklet

1-sided

2-sided

Left/Right

2-sided

Top/Bottom

Left binding

Right binding

Top binding

F i n i s h e d

Register

S t i t c h i n g

O f f

Stitching

Front cov.

Center

Staple

Paper size Set

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

10 Touch the “Cover” key and select whether or not (and where) to copy on each of the front and back covers.

Inch specifications

2 sided mode.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Front cover

Rear cover

Back Close

Front cover

No cover

Cover

Blank

Front copy

Back copy

2 sided copy

Blank

Front copy

Back copy

2 sided copy


Duplex Mode.

Stitching Front cover.

Front cover

No cover

Cover

Blank

Front copy

Back copy

2-sided copy

Paper size Set

Back cover

Back Close

Blank

Front copy

Back copy

2-sided copy

5-23-1









5-24


11. Making booklets from book originals [Book to Booklet mode]

With this mode, you can add covers, and either copy onto them or not, so that the finished copy sets will appear like a magazine, etc.

●

With a cover

The original that will be used as the cover will be scanned first so that, when the finished copies are folded, that page will act as the front and back cover to the copy set.

NOTES

Inch specifications

• Only 8

1/2

"x 11" and 11" x 17" size originals and 11"x 8

1/2

", 8

1/2

"x 11", and 11" x 17" size copy paper can be used in this mode.

• If the optional Document Finisher is is installed on your copier, you will be able to select center stapling. If the optional Center-Folding Unit is installed as well, you will be able to center fold those stapled sets. Only

11" x 17" and 8

1/2

" x 11" size copy paper can be center folded and stapled.



• Only A3, A4R, and A5R size originals and A3, A4, and A4R size copy paper can be used in this mode.

• In metric specification copiers produced for the Asia-Pacific region, only A3, B4, A4R, B5R and A5R size originals and A3, B4, A4, A4R,

B5 and B5R size copy paper can be used in this mode.

• If the optional Document Finisher is is installed on your copier, you will be able to select center stapling. If the optional Center-Folding Unit is installed as well, you will be able to center fold those stapled sets. Only

A3, B4, and A4R size copy paper can be center folded and stapled.


3

1 2 A

B

6

5

4

3

2 1 A

B

6

5

4

●

Without a cover

When the finished copies are folded, the front and back of the copy set will be blank.

3

2 1 A B 5

6

4

3

2 1

4

6

5

A

B

A

B

1 Set the open-faced (book, etc.) original to be copied.


5-25

3 Touch the “Booklet” key. The “Booklet” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

4 Touch the “Book / Booklet” key. The screen to specify the binding direction of the originals and the finished copies will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Booklet Register Back Close

E d i t o n e o r t wo s i d e d o r i g i n a l p a g e s a n d o u t p u t a b o o k .

U s e B o o k - b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .

None

Booklet

Book

➔ Booklet


Ready to copy.

Booklet

None

Booklet

Book

R Booklet

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

E d i t 1 - a n d 2 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l s a n d o u t p u t a s b o o k .

U s e B o o k R b o o k l e t fo r b o o k o r i g i n a l .


5 Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the finished copies.

Inch specifications

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Set first page.

Press "Start" key.

Booklet

Original

None

Booklet

Book

➔

Booklet

Book

Left

Book

Right

Finishing

Open from left

Open from right

Register copy front

Off

Copy on front cvr

Saddle

Stitch

Back Close

Check direction



Set first page.

Press "START" button.

Booklet


None

Booklet

Book

R Booklet

Book

Left

Book

Right

Left binding

Right binding

Paper size

Set

Register

C o py f r o n t

O f f

Copy on front cov.

Back Close



Center

Staple

6 If the optional Document Finisher is installed on your copier, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center Staple”] key will be displayed and you will be able to select center stapling.

If the optional Center-Folding Unit is installed as well, you will be able to center fold those stapled sets.

In this case, if you DO want the center stapling operation, or the center stapling and folding operation, to be performed, touch the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center Staple”] key and go to the next step.

Inch specifications

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Set first page.

Press "Start" key.

Booklet

Original

None

Booklet

Book

➔ Booklet

Book

Left

Book

Right

Finishing

Open from left

Open from right

Register copy front

Off

Copy on front cvr

Saddle

Stitch

Back Close

Check direction



Set first page.


Booklet


None

Booklet

Book

R Booklet

Book

Left

Book

Right

Left binding

Right binding

Paper size

Set

Register

C o py f r o n t

O f f

Copy on front cov.

Back Close



Center

Staple

If you do NOT want either operation to be performed, go directly to step 8.

5-25-1


7 Touch the “Saddle Stitch” key or the “Bind & Fold” key, as appropriate.

* It is possible for you to center staple, or center staple and fold, up to 16 copy sheets (64 layout pages) at one time.

Inch specifications

Set first page.

Press "Start" key.

Saddle Stitch

Pape Set

100%

8 / x11"

Back Close

Off

Saddle stitch

Bind &

Fold


Duplex Mode.

Saddle Stitch

Paper size Set

Back Close

Off

Saddle

Stitch

Bind

& Fold

NOTE

The “Bind & Fold” key will only be displayed when the optional

Center-Folding Unit is installed on your copier.


Inch specifications

Set first page.

Press "Start" key.

Copy on front cover

Off

On

When selecting "ON" for copying on the front cover, follow the instruction.

1. Scan front cover book original

2. Start scan book originals

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back Close

Check direction



Set first page.


Copy on front cover

Off

On

W h e n s e l e c t i n g " O N " fo r c o py i n g o n t h e f r o n t c ove r, fo l l ow t h e i n s t r u c t i o n .

1 . S c a n f r o n t c ove r b o o k o r i g i n a l .

2 . S t a r t s c a n b o o k o r i g i n a l s.

Paper size Set

Back Close



IMPORTANT!

If you DO want to copy onto the covers, be absolutely certain to set the original that you want to have copied onto the cover first.

8 If you want to add covers, touch the “Copy on front cvr” key.

The “Copy on front cover” screen will be displayed.

At this point, if you do NOT want to copy onto the covers, go directly to step 10.

Inch specifications

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Set first page.

Press "Start" key.

Booklet

Original

None

Booklet

Book

➔ Booklet

Book

Left

Book

Right

Finishing

Open from left

Open from right

Register copy front

Off

Copy on front cvr

Saddle

Stitch

Back Close

Check direction



Set first page.


Booklet


None

Booklet

Book

R Booklet

Book

Left

Book

Right

Left binding

Right binding

Paper size Set

Register

C o py f r o n t

O f f

Copy on front cov.

Back Close



Center

Staple


Scanning of the original will start.

When a message appears telling you to set the next original, go to the next step.

5-26





5-27


12. Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher

[Sort/Finished mode]

Since copying in this mode is performed after multiple originals are scanned and memorized, copies can be sorted into the required number of sets even without the optional Document Finisher.

When “Sort:ON” and “On”[“1 set”] are selected

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

When “Sort:OFF” and “On”[“Output each page”] are selected

1

1

1

1

2

3

3 Touch the “Sort/Finished” key. The “Sort/Finished” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

3

3

3

(when there is paper loaded of the same size but different orientation)

4 Touch the “Sort:ON” key.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Sort/Finished

Sort

Sort:OFF

Sort:ON

Off

On

Sorting

Register

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back Close

NOTES

• If you do not have paper of the same size but different orientations available for paper feed, copies will be ejected without being

“sorted” in this way.

• You can also select whether or not the Sort mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Sort mode ON/OFF” on page 7-56.)


Ready to copy.

Sort/Finished

S o r t

Sort:Off

Sort:On

G r o u p

None

1 set

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close



5 Touch the “On”[“1 set”] key.

6 Use the keypad to set the number of copies to be made.


Copying will start.

5-28


13. Auto rotation function

If the orientation of the original is different from that of the paper loaded in the drawers[cassettes], the image will be automatically turned 90 degrees counter-clockwise for copying. No special setting is required in order to use this function.

3 Touch the “No rotate” key.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Auto Rotation

No rotate

Rotate

Register

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Back Close

When original and paper have different direction, image will be rotated.


Ready to copy.

Auto Rotation

No rotate

Rotate

Register

Paper size

Set

Back Close

W h e n o r i g i n a l a n d p a p e r h ave d i f fe r e n t d i r e c t i o n , o r i g i n a l w i l l b e r o t a t e d a u t o m a t i c a l l y.

IMPORTANT!


This function will only work with 5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

" or 8

1/2

" x 11" size copy paper.


This function will only work with A5R or A4 size copy paper.

NOTE

You can also select whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Auto Rotation mode ON/OFF” on page 7-57.)

If you want to disengage the auto rotation function, perform the following procedure.

1 Touch the “Function” tab and then the “

▼

Down” key.


2 Touch the “Auto Rotation” key. The “Auto Rotation” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror Up

Down

Program Basic User choice Function


Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert


Memo pages

Mirror

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

5-29


14. Auto selection/Filing mode

With this mode, when you are using the Document Processor without pressing one of the paper size keys, and thereby, specifying a desired paper size, originals will be checked one by one for their size, and you can select to either have paper of the same size as each original selected automatically (auto selection) or to have the originals all copied onto one single size of copy paper (filing).

●

Matching finished sizes (Filing)

All originals will copied onto the same size copy paper.

11"

✕

17"

(A3)

8

1/2

"

✕

14"

(Folio)

B4

11"

✕

8 1/2 "

(A4)

8 1/2 "

✕

11"

(A4R)

B5

1

Set the originals to be copied in the Document Processor.

2

Press the [Auto Selection] key.

The lamp in the [Auto Selection] key will light and the auto selection/filing mode screen will be displayed.

NOTES

• You can set up to 30 originals in the Document Processor in this mode.

Inch specifications

• Only 11" x 8

1/2

" and 11" x 17", or 8

1/2

" x 14" and 8

1/2

" x 11", size originals can be used together in this mode, and the originals must be arranged together so that their widths coincide.


• Only A4 and A3, B5 and B4, or A4R and Folio, size originals can be used together in this mode, and the originals must be arranged together so that their widths coincide.

●

Differing finished sizes (Auto selection)

Each original will copied onto the same size copy paper as that original.

3

Touch the “Auto selection” key or the “Electronic Filing” key, as appropriate.

If you selected “Auto selection”, go directly to step 6.

If you selected “Electronic Filing”, go to the next step.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Auto Selection Register Back Close

Able to copy mix size originals at one time using Document processor.

Off

Auto selection

Electronic

Filing


Ready to copy.

Auto selection

Off

Auto selection

Electronic

Filing

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

Able to copy mixed size originals at one time using Document processor.

5-30

4 Specify the size of the very first original to be copied and then touch the “Close” key.

The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

Inch specifications

Place originals in Document processor.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Auto Selection Register Back Close

1st original

Off

Auto selection

Electronic

Filing

8 1 /

2 x11"/

11x8 1 /

2

"

8

1

/

2 x14"/

11x17"

Able to scan mix size originals at one time using Document processor, and copy them in unified paper size.


Place originals in Document processor.

Auto selection

1st original

Off

Auto selection

Electronic

Filing

A4 /B5 /

A4

A3 /B4 /

Folio

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

Able to scan different size originals at one time using Document processor, and copy them to unified paper size.

NOTE

In order to have the binding direction set properly for stapling or hole punching, etc., finished copies, be sure to specify the size of the very first original being copied.

5 Select the desired drawer[cassette].

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

11x8

1

/

2

"

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

"

Color

11x8

1 /

2

"

Plain

Basic

AMS

Bypass

Plain

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function


Ready to copy.

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

AMS

Bypass

Plain

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size Set

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge


Copying will start.


5-31


15. Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets [Cover mode]

With this mode, you can select to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and/or back covers to your copy sets.

NOTE

It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on page 7-49.)

You can select separately whether you want both sides or only one side of both the front and back covers to be copied onto, or to have either or both of them left completely blank. Select also whether or not you even want to include a back cover at all.

Front cover Back cover

2 sided copy[Duplex Copy]*

Front copy

Back copy*

Blank

No back cover

* The illustrations above show the result when sets of 2-sided copies are being made.

If you are making sets of 1-sided copies, copying will not be performed on the rear side of the covers even if the 2-sided copy [Duplex Copy] or

Back copy settings are selected.

5-32



3 Touch the “Cover Mode” key. The “Cover Mode” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

4 Touch the “Cover” key. The screen to make the front cover settings will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Register Back Close Cover Mode

Front cover

No cover

Cover

Insert Color or Thick, etc paper as a front/back cover.

Able to copy on same paper.

Set the cover paper for specify drawer.


Ready to copy.

Cover Mode

Fr o n t c ove r

No cover

Cover

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

I n s e r t f r o n t & b a ck c ove r p a p e r ( C o l o u r /

T h i ck e t c . . . ) t o h e a d & e n d o f c o py.

S e t c ove r p a p e r i n d e d i g n a t e d p a p e r c a s s e t t e.


5 Select the desired settings for the front cover.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Cover Mode

Front cover

No cover

Cover

Blank

Front copy

Back copy

2 sided copy

Register

Rear cover

No cover

Cover

Back Close


Ready to copy.

Cover Mode

Fr o n t c ove r

No cover

Cover

Blank

Front copy

Back copy

Duplex

Copy

Register

B a ck c ove r

No cover

Cover

Paper size Set

Back Close

6 Touch the “Cover” key or the “No cover” key, as appropriate, to select whether or not you want to include a back cover.

If you selected “Cover”, the screen to make the back cover settings will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Cover Mode

Front cover

Back Close

No cover

Cover

Blank

Front copy

Register

Rear cover

Back copy

2 sided copy

No cover

Cover


Ready to copy.

Cover Mode

Fr o n t c ove r

No cover

Cover

Blank

Front copy

Back copy

Duplex

Copy

Register

B a ck c ove r

No cover

Cover

Paper size Set

Back Close

7 Select the desired settings for the back cover.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Cover Mode

Front cover

No cover

Cover

Blank

Front copy

Back copy

2 sided copy

Register

Rear cover

No cover

Cover

Back

Blank

Front copy

Close

Back copy

2 sided copy


Ready to copy.

Cover Mode

Fr o n t c ove r

No cover

Cover

Blank

Front copy

Back copy

Duplex

Copy

Paper size Set

Register

B a ck c ove r

No cover

Cover

Back

Blank

Front copy

Close

Back copy

Duplex

Copy

5-33









5-34


16. Original size selection mode

With this mode, if you manually select a size for the original, only that size image will be scanned for copying. Use this mode as well when copying from originals of non-standard sizes.

A

B C

8 1/2 " x 11"

A4

NOTES

• You can register the size of non-standard originals that you often use as a custom original size. (See “Custom original size” on page 7-43.)

• ALWAYS set non-standard sized originals on the platen.

• Once you select the original size under this mode, you can copy with originals set on the platen even with the Document

Processor open.

• If this mode is used in combination with the Centering/Image shift mode, you can, for example, have the image of non-standard sized originals centered on standard sized copy paper. (See

“Centering/Image shift mode” on page 5-8.)



3 Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size original”] key. The

“Select original size” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

4 If you want to select a standard scanning size, touch the key that corresponds to the desired size and then go directly to step 7.

If you want to select the dimensions of the scan area manually, go to the next step.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Select original size

Select size

Input size

Auto

11x17"

8

1

/

2 x11"

11x8 1 /

2

"

8 1 /

2 x14"

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"


Ready to copy.

Select size original

Auto

Select size

Input size

Register

11x15"

A4

A4

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back Close

User regist.

5 1 /

2 x5 1 /

2

"

8 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"

11x11"

9x9"

Paper size Set

Register

Folio

Back Close

Use regist

100X100mm

150X150mm

200X200mm

120X120mm

NOTE

If you have registered a custom original size, you will be able to select that size for use in this mode. (See “Custom original size” on page 7-43.)

5 Touch the “Input size” key. The screen to set the dimensions of the scan area will be displayed.

5-35


6 Based on the left rear corner of the platen being a setting of

“0”, touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the dimensions of the scan area to the desired setting.

* In metric specification copiers, the dimensions can also be entered directly by touching the “#keys” key and then using the keypad.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set


Select size

Input size

2 11 5 /

8

2 "

Register

2 17

2 "

Back Close

S e t o r i g i n a l o n p l a t e n a n d i n p u t s c a n n i n g ra n g e. ( Y s i d e, X s i d e )


Ready to copy.


Select size

Input size

#-Keys #-Keys

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

S c a n n i n g ra n g e c a n b e s e t w i t h

X - Y d i r e c t i o n w h e n o r i g i n a l i s p l a c e d a t l e f t r e a r c o r n e r.


Copying will start.

5-36


17. Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies

[Transparency + backing sheet mode]


When 2 or 3 transparencies are piled on top of one another, static electricity can cause problems. This mode automatically places a backing sheet between the transparencies during copying for easy handling. You can also select whether or not to have the image of the original copied onto the backing sheet, or even make multiple copies from the same original.

2 Set the transparency film on the multi-bypass tray.

IMPORTANT!

When copying onto transparencies, ALWAYS use the multi-bypass tray.

A

B

●

Copying onto the backing sheet

With this setting, after the original is copied onto the transparency, the same image will be copied onto the backing sheet as well. (The asterisk “*” in the illustration indicates the transparencies.)

● Leaving the backing sheet blank

With this setting, the original will be copied onto the transparency but the backing sheet will be left blank. (The asterisk “*” in the illustration indicates the transparencies.)

IMPORTANT!

• Fan through the transparencies before setting them.

• Up to 25 transparencies can be set on the multi-bypass tray at one time.

• Make sure that paper of the same size and orientation as the transparencies has been loaded into a drawer[cassette].

3 Touch the “Function” tab and then the “ ▼ Down” key.


4 Touch the “OHP backing” [“OHP back”] key. The “OHP backing” [“OHP back”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror Up

Down



Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert


Memo pages

Mirror

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

5-37


5 Touch the “Copy” key or the “Blank” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

OHP bac king Register Back Close

None

Copy

Blank

I n s e r t a bl a n k p a p e r b e t we e n p i e c e o f

O H P f i l m , o r c o py t o a O H P b a ck p a p e r.

P l a c e t h e O H P f i l m i n t h e by p a s s.


Ready to copy.

Paper size Set

Back Close Register

None

Copy

Blank

I n s e r t bl a n k p a p e r b e t we e n O H P f i l m s o r c o py t o O H P b a ck p a p e r.

P l a c e O H P f i l m o n by p a s s.


Copying will start.

5-38


18. Inverting black and white [Invert mode]

With this mode, you can make copies where the black and white areas of the image are inverted (or reversed).

* If multiple inverted copies are being made, “Please wait Now cleaning” may be displayed.


Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Invert

Off

On

Register

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back Close

C o py t h e s c a n n e d i m a g e w i t h r eve r s i n g bl a ck a n d w h i t e p a r t s.


Ready to copy.

Invert

Off

On

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

C o py s c a n n e d i m a g e w i t h bl a ck a n d w h i t e p a r t s r eve r s e d .



3 Touch the “ ▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be displayed.

4 Touch the “Invert” key. The “Invert” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror Up

Down



Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert


Memo pages

Mirror

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down


Copying will start.

5-39


19. Making mirror image copies [Mirror image mode]

With this mode, you can make mirror image copies.


Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Mirror

Off

On


Ready to copy.

Mirror

Off

On



3 Touch the “ ▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be displayed.

4 Touch the “Mirror” key. The “Mirror” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror Up

Down



Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert


Memo pages

Mirror

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down


Copying will start.

Register

Paper Size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Back Close

R eve r s e s c a n n e d i m a g e l e f t t o r i g h t , m i r r o r i m a g e.

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

R eve r s e d s c a n n e d i m a g e l e f t t o r i g h t a s a r e f l e c t i o n i n t h e m i r r o r.

5-40


20. Making a test copy prior to large volume copying [Proof mode]

With this mode, you can use the same settings to create a single set of test copies in order to verify the results prior to actually starting to make a large number of copies or copy sets. This way, if there is a problem with the copies, you can cancel print out in order to change the settings and eliminate a great majority of miss-copying.


Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Proof Copy

Off

On

Register

Paper

8 1 /

2 x11

Back

Set

Close

W h e n " O n " i s s e l e c t e d , c o py i n g s t o p s a f t e r o n e s e t i s e j e c t e d .

T h i s i s u s e f u l fo r c h e ck i n g f i n i s h i n g .


Ready to copy.

Test Copy

Off

On

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

I f " O n " i s s e l e c t e d , c o py i n g s t o p s a f t e r o n e s e t i s e j e c t e d .

F i n i s h i n g r e s u l t c a n t h e n b e c h e cke d .



3 Touch the “

▼

Down” key. The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be displayed.

4 Touch the “Proof Copy” [“Test copy”] key. The “Proof Copy”

[“Test copy”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Up

Down



Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert


Memo pages

Mirror

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down


Copying will start.

8




Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the “Scanning finished” key. Copying of the test copy set will start.

5-41


9 Once the test copy set is complete, a screen will be displayed in order to verify whether or not you want to make the initially designated number of copy sets at the present settings, and the copier will enter a waiting-to-copy state.

Check the test copies.

Inch specifications

C h e ck p r o o f c o py.

W h e n s t o p p i n g a n d r e t r y p r e s s " C a n c e l " key.

W h e n c o n t i nu e t o p r i n t , p r e s s " S t a r t " key.

O r i g . p a g e C o u n t / S e t O u t p u t

11x8

1

/

2

"

1 sided

Rear

100%

APS

11x8 1 /

2

"

2 sided

Sort/Staple/Punch

Cancel

Change

Preset

Job130


C h e ck t e s t c o py.

To s t o p a n d r e t r y , p r e s s " C a n c e l " key.

To c o n t i nu e t o p r i n t , p r e s s " S t a r t " key.

O r i g i n a l C o u n t / s e t

A4

1-sided

R top/Rear

100%

APS

A4

2-sided

Sort/Staple/Punch

O u t p u t

Cancel

Change

Preset

JOB130

● If there is no problem with the copies…

Press the [Start] key and copying of the initially designated number of copy sets will start.

If you want to change the number of copies to be made, press the [Change Preset] key and enter the actual number of copies you do want to make.

●

If there is some problem with the copies…

Touch the “Cancel” key to cancel the copy job and start the procedure from the beginning.

5-42

21. Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished

[Repeat copy mode]

With this mode, if you think you might want to make another set of the same copies even after the initial copy job is finished, simply turn the repeat copy mode ON and you can make the necessary number of additional copies later. In order to maintain privacy, you can make it necessary to enter a security code in order to use the repeat copy mode so that, if the entered code doesn’t match the registered security code, it will not be possible to use the repeat copy mode.

4 Touch the “Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror Up

Down



Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert

Program

Memo pages

Mirror

Paper size Set

Up

Down

NOTES

• All data for repeat copying will be deleted when the main switch is turned OFF.

• Repeat copying registration is not available for print out under document management or with the form overlay mode.

• You can prohibit repeat copying as well as make repeat copying the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Repeat copying ON/

OFF” on page 7-61.)

User choice Function Basic


Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Modify Copy

Security

Off

On

# keys

Program

Register

Paper Size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Back Close

W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , d a t a c a n b e s ave d .

Yo u c a n r e c a l l a n d r e - p r i n t a t a ny t i m e.

Yo u c a n s e t t h e p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e s ave d d o c u m e n t .

(1) Registering a copy job for repeat copying





Ready to copy.

Modify copy

Security

Off

On

#-Keys

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , j o b c a n b e s ave d .


Yo u c a n s e t a p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e s ave d d o c u m e n t .

3 Touch the “

▼


If you want to register a security code, go to the next step.

If you do NOT want to register a security code, go directly to step 7.

5-43


6 Touch the “#keys” key to highlight that key and then enter the security code that will enable repeat copying for these originals.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Modify Copy Register Back Close

Off

On

Security

# keys





Ready to copy.

Modify copy

Off

On

Security

#-Keys

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

W h e n s e l e c t [ O n ] , j o b c a n b e s ave d .


Yo u c a n s e t a p a s swo r d t o s e c u r e s ave d d o c u m e n t .

(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode

Once you press the [Repeat Copy] key, the “Modify copy” list will be displayed so that you can verify the copy jobs that are registered for repeat copying. It is possible to reprint, check the contents of, and delete the copy jobs that are registered in this list.

1 Reprinting a registered copy job

1 Press the [Repeat Copy] key. The “Modify copy” list will be displayed.

NOTES

• The security code can be between 1 and 8 digits long.

• If you forget the security code that you enter here, repeat copying will not be possible for these originals. Be sure to keep some sort of record of the security code.


Copying will start.





2 Select the copy job that you want to reprint and touch the

“Reprint” key.

Inch specifications

Modify copy

Job

119

120

121

122

User

– – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – –

Original

7

3

10

1

Reprint

Set

1

5

2

6

Registration

10/10 22:37

10/10 22:40

10/10 22:45

10/10 22:50

Delete

Type

Normal

Normal

Normal

Normal

Check details

Modify Copy

End

10/10 22:50


Modify copy

Job

119

120

121

122

User

– – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

Original

7

3

10

1

Reprint

Modify copy

Set

1

5

2

6

Registration

10/10 22:37

10/10 22:40

10/10 22:45

10/10 22:50

Delete

Type

Norm copy

Norm copy

Norm copy

Norm copy

Check details

End

10/10 22:50

If you designated a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying, the code input screen will be displayed. In this case, go to the next step.

If you did NOT designate a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying, the screen to select the number of copies or copy sets to be made will be displayed. In this case, go directly to step 4.

5-44

3 Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and the touch the “Enter” key. If the entered code matches the registered one, the screen to select the number of copies or copy sets to be made will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Stop

Enter the re-print code.

Clear

(Enter by #key)

Enter



Stop

Clear

(Enter #-key)

Enter


2 Checking the contents of registered copy jobs


NOTES

• To reenter a mistaken security code, touch the “Clear” key.

• If you touch the “Stop” key, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

4 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to set the number of copies or copy sets to be made.

Inch specifications

Reprint Stop

Set


Reprint

5 Touch the “Printing” key.

Print out will start.

Set

Printing

Stop

Printing

2 Select the copy job that you want to check the content of and touch the “Check detail” key.

Inch specifications

End Modify copy

Job

119

120

121

122

User

– – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – –

Original

7

3

10

1

Reprint

Set

1

5

2

6

Registration

10/10 22:37

10/10 22:40

10/10 22:45

10/10 22:50

Delete

Type

Normal

Normal

Normal

Normal

Check details

Modify Copy

10/10 22:50


Modify copy

Job

119

120

121

122

User

– – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

Original

7

3

10

1

Reprint

Set

1

5

2

6

Registration

10/10 22:37

10/10 22:40

10/10 22:45

10/10 22:50

Delete

Type

Norm copy

Norm copy

Norm copy

Norm copy

Check details

Modify copy

End

10/10 22:50

If you designated a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying, the code input screen will be displayed. In this case, go to the next step.

If you did NOT designate a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying, the “Check details / Reprint” screen will be displayed. In this case, go directly to step 4.

5-45


3 Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and the touch the “Enter” key. If the entered code matches the registered one, the “Check details / Reprint” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Stop


Clear

(Enter by #key)

Enter



Stop

Clear

(Enter #-key)

Enter

4 Check the contents of the selected job. You can also check the content of the first page of the copy job by touching the

“Print from 1st” [“Head print”] key.

Inch specifications

Check details / Reprint

Item

User name

Job name

Orig. page

Set

Print size

Input source

Registration date

Output

Job120

Details

– – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – –

3

5

11 x 8 1 /

2

" copy

10/10 22:40

Output tray

Print from 1st

Close


Check details / Reprint

Item

User name

Job name

Original

Set

Print size

Input source

Registration date

Output

Job120

Details

– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

3

5

A4

Copy

10/10 22:40

Output tray

Head print

Close

5 Once you have finished checking the content of the copy job, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

6 If you want to check the contents of another registered copy job, repeat steps 2 through 5.

7 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

3 Deleting a registered copy jobs


2 Select the copy job that you want to delete and touch the

“Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

End Modify copy

Job

119

120

121

122

Modify Copy

User

– – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – –

Original

7

3

10

1

Reprint

Set

1

5

2

6

Registration

10/10 22:37

10/10 22:40

10/10 22:45

10/10 22:50

Delete

Type

Normal

Normal

Normal

Normal

Check details

10/10 22:50


Modify copy

Job

119

120

121

122

User

– – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

Original

7

3

10

1

Reprint

Set

1

5

2

6

Registration

10/10 22:37

10/10 22:40

10/10 22:45

10/10 22:50

Delete

Type

Norm copy

Norm copy

Norm copy

Norm copy

Check details

Modify copy

End

10/10 22:50

3 Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications

Stop

Job # : 117

User name : -----------------------

Job name : -----------------------

Delete this job. Do you really want to delete?

Yes No


Stop

Job # : 117

User name : -----------------------

Job name : -----------------------

Delete this job. Do you really want to delete?

Yes No

If you selected “Yes”, the selected copy job will be canceled and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2 without canceling the selected job.

5-46

4 If you want to cancel another registered copy job, repeat steps 2 through 3.

5 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.


5-47


22. Copying a large volume of originals in one operation

[Batch scanning mode]

With this mode, you can scan multiple sets of originals and then have them all copied at the same time. Scan one set of originals of the same type and then register that as a single step in the copy job, and you can copy an extremely large volume of originals in one batch.


Inch specifications

Place originals then press Start key.

Continuous scanning

Off

On

A B C

A

B

C


Set original.

Press Start key.

Multiple scanning

Off

On 1 Set the originals to be copied.




Register

Register

Paper Size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Back Close

C o py s c a n n e d i m a g e s o f f.

P l a t e n a s o n e j o b o r s c a n n e d o r i g i n a l s u s i n g d o c u m e n t p r o c e s s o r.

Paper size Set

Back Close

O r i g i n a l s s c a n n e d t h r o u g h t h e p l a t e n a n d D o c u m e n t P r o c e s s o r c a n b e p r o c e s s e d a s o n e c o py j o b.

3 Touch the “Batch scanning” [“Large # of originals”] key.

The “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

6 Replace the first originals with the next set and press the

[Start] key. Scanning of those next originals (the next step in the copy job) will start.


5-48


23. Saving on toner use [Eco print mode]

With this mode, you can reduce the amount of toner that is used to make the copies.

Use this mode with, for example making test copies, when you do not especially need to print out high quality copies. You can also make the eco print mode the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Eco print mode ON/OFF” on page 7-44.)

* Images will be printed out relatively lighter than normal.

4 Touch the “Eco print” key. The “Eco print” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror Up

Down

With the eco print mode turned OFF

With the eco print mode turned ON



Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror

Paper size Set

Up

Down

1

2

3


Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab will be displayed.

Touch the “ ▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be displayed.

User choice Function Basic Program

5 Touch the “Off” key or the “On” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11 x 8 1 /

2

"

Set

Eco Pr int Register Back

Eco print is saving toner consumption, and it is economically.

Eco Print

It is possible to reduce toner consumption.

Image is light.

Close

Off On


Ready to copy.

Paper size Set

Register

E c o P r i n t e n a bl e s t o n e r c o n s u m p t i o n r e d u c t i o n .

Back Close

E c o P r i n t

To n e r c o n s u m p t i o n c a n b e r e d u c e d .

I m a g e r e s o l u t i o n r e d u c e d .

Off On


Copying will start.

5-49


24. Original set direction

It is necessary to specify the direction in which the originals were set whenever you use the 2-sided copy modes, the page separation/split copy modes, the margin mode, the centering/image shift mode, the memo mode, the border erase modes, the combine/merge copy modes, the print page numbers mode, the booklet/stitching mode, the auto selection/filing mode, the staple mode (optional) and the punch mode (optional). You can also use the following procedure to perform the setting as well.


2 Touch the “

▼


3 Touch the “Orig.set direction” key. The “Orig.set direction” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror Up

Down



Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert


Memo pages

Mirror

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

4 Touch the “Rear” [“Back Edge”] key or the “Left top corner” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11 x 8 1

/

2

"

Set

Orig. set direction Register Back

Check direction


Close

"Check direction original" can be shown at right side of display.

Follow the steps. If setting mode is wrong, incorrect copy will result.

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Paper size Set

Orig. set direction Register Back



Close

" C h e ck d i r e c t i o n o r i g i n a l " c a n b e s h ow n a t r i g h t s i d e o f d i s p l ay.

Fo l l ow t h e s t e p s. I f s e t t i n g m o d e i s w r o n g , i n c o r r e c t c o py w i l l r e s u l t .

Back Edge

Left top corner

5-50


25. Memorizing frequently used settings [Program function]

Up to eight combinations of copy modes and other functions displayed on the operation panel can be registered as a single program using this function. You can also register a name for each registered program.

5 Use the displayed keyboard to enter the desired name and then touch the “End” key.

Inch specifications

(1) Registering a program

1 Set the desired copy modes, etc., to be registered.

2

3

Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab will be displayed.

Touch the “Register” key.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Recall

Paper Size

11 x 8

1 /

2

"

Set

Reg./delete

Register

Delete

Change name



Ready to copy.

R e c a l l

Paper size Set

Program

Reg./delete

Register

Delete

Change name



NOTE

Refer to “Entering characters” on page 7-79 for information on entering characters.

4 Touch any key that is marked “No registration” and that corresponds to the program key (1 – 8) under which you want to register the settings. The screen to register a name for that program will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Register present setting

Select program number.

End

No registration

No registration

No registration

No registration

No registration

No registration

No registration

No registration



Select program number.

No registration

No registration

No registration

No registration

No registration

No registration

No registration

No registration

End


If you selected “Yes”, the selected program will be registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.

Copying is now possible using the settings that were registered under that program.

Inch specifications

Stop Register program.

Program # : 1

Program name :Catalog A

The set program is registered. Is it correct?

Yes No


Register program.

Program # : 1

Program name : Catalog A

The set program is registered. Is it correct?

Yes No

Stop

5-51


(2) Using programmed settings to make copies

1

2


Touch the program key under which the settings that you want to use are registered.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11 x 8 1

/

2

"

Set

Recall

Catalog A

Catalog B

Catalog C

Catalog D

Basic User choice

File A

File B

List A

Function Program

Reg./delete

Register

Delete

Change name


Ready to copy.

R e c a l l

Catalog A

Catalog B

Catalog C

Catalog D

Basic

File A

File B

User choice

List A

Function Program

Paper size Set

Reg./delete

Register

Delete

Change name

3 Set the originals to be copied and press the [Start] key.

Copying will start using the settings that were registered under that program.

(3) Changing a registered program name

1

2


Touch the “Change name” key.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Recall

Catalog A

Catalog B

Catalog C

Catalog D

Basic

File A

File B

User choice

List A

Function Program

Paper Size

11 x 8 1 /

2

"

Set

Reg./delete

Register

Delete

Change name


Ready to copy.

R e c a l l

Catalog A

Catalog B

Catalog C

Catalog D

Basic

File A

File B

User choice

List A

Function

Paper size Set

Program

Reg./delete

Register

Delete

Change name

3 Touch the program key (1 – 8) for which you want to change the registered name.

The screen to register a name for that program will be displayed.

Inch specifications

End Registration name change

Select the number for changing name.

Catalog A

Catalog B

Catalog C

Catalog D

End

4 Touch the “ r ”, “ R ”, “Back” and/or “Del.” keys to delete the currently registered name and, once you enter the desired name for that program, touch the “End” key.

Inch specifications

Catalog

File A

File B

No registration

List A


Registration name change

Select the number for changing name.

Catalog A

Catalog B

Catalog C

Catalog D

File A

File B

No registration

List A

NOTE


5


Once “The set program is registered. Is it correct?” is displayed, check the entered name and, if it is correct, touch the “Yes” key.

The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

5-52

(4) Deleting a registered program

1 Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab will be displayed.

2 Touch the “Delete” key.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Recall

Catalog A

Catalog B

Catalog C

Catalog D

Basic User choice

File A

File B

List A

Function


Ready to copy.

R e c a l l

Catalog A

Catalog B

Catalog C

Catalog D

Basic User choice

File A

File B

List A

Function

Program

Paper Size

11 x 8 1

/

2

"

Set

Reg./delete

Register

Delete

Change name

Paper size Set

Program

Reg./delete

Register

Delete

Change name

3 Touch the program key (1 – 8) that corresponds to the program that you want to delete.

lnch specifications

Delete registration

Select the number of program to delete.

End

Catalog A

Catalog B

Catalog C

Catalog D

File A

File B

No registration

List A


Delete registration

Select the number of program to delete.

Catalog A

Catalog B

Catalog C

Catalog D

File A

File B

No registration

List A

End



Inch specifications

Delete program.

Stop

P r o gra m #

P r o gra m n a m e C a t a l o g A

T h i s p r o gra m w i l l b e d e l e t e d . A r e yo u s u r e ?

Yes No


Delete program.

P r o gra m #

P r o gra m n a m e C a t a l o g A

T h i s p r o gra m w i l l b e d e l e t e d . A r e yo u s u r e ?

YES NO

Stop

If you selected “Yes”, the selected program will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 without deleting the selected program.

5-53


26. Registration keys

You can register up to 3 functions and/or modes, from among those displayed in the “Function” tab, under the registration keys. The functions and modes in the “Basic” tab and the “User choice” tab can be registered under registration keys as well.

(1) Registering a function or mode under a function key

Perform the following procedure when you want to register a function or mode under a registration key.

To register a function or mode under a registration key, refer to the following sample procedure (which shows how to register the “4 in 1” combine/merge copy mode under a registration key).

IMPORTANT!

In order to register functions and/or modes under registration keys, you must first turn the setting ON under “Registration keys ON/

OFF” on page 7-63.


2 Touch the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key. The “Combine”

[“Merge copy”] screen will be displayed.

lnch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

3 Touch the “4 in 1” key and then the “Register” key.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Combine

None

Layout

Register

Border line

None

Solid

Dotted

Borders

Paper size

50%

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Merge copy

L ayo u t

None

2-in-1

4-in-1

Paper size

Set

Register

B o r d e r l i n e

None

Solid

Dotted

Cropmark

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

4 In the “Register” screen, touch the “Register” key once again.

The screen to register functions and/or modes under registration keys will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select item

End Register

Register

Delete


Select item

Register

Register

Delete

End

5-54


5 Touch the registration key under which you want to register the function. “Register this selecting mode. OK?” will be displayed.

Inch specifications

End Register present setting

S e l e c t t h e nu m b e r o f p r o gra m t o r e g i s t e r e d .

No registration

No registration

No registration



S e l e c t t h e nu m b e r o f p r o gra m t o r e g i s t e r e d .

No registration

No registration

No registration

End

NOTE

If, in the screen to register functions and/or modes under registration keys, you select a previously registered key, the following screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Register this function.

T h i s nu m b e r i s a l r e a d y r e g i s t e r e d .

Stop

R e g i s t e r N o. 1

R e g i s t e r t h i s s e l e c t i n g m o d e. O K ?

Yes No



T h i s nu m b e r i s a l r e a d y r e g i s t e r e d



YES NO

Stop

If you selected “Yes”, the selected function will be registered under the registration key.

If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 5 without registering the selected function.

6 Touch the “Yes” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen will be displayed again.

Inch specifications


Stop



Yes No





YES NO

Stop

7 Touch the “Close” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key will now appear on the right side of the touch panel as a registration key.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

8

1

/

2 x11"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down

Combine


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality orig.

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice


Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

Merge Copy

NOTE

The functions and modes in the “Basic” tab and the “User choice” tab can be registered under registration keys as well. A “Register” key will be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be registered under the registration keys.

5-55


(2) Deleting a registration key

Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a registration key.

1 Touch the registration (to the right of the “Basic” tab) that you want to delete. (Example: “Combine” [“Merge copy”]) lnch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

"

11x8

Color

1 /

2

"

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

"

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge


Ready to copy.

Paper Size Set

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

2 In the resulting screen for that function or mode (example: the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen), touch the “Register” key. The “Register” screen will be displayed.

lnch specifications

Ready to copy.

Combine

None

Layout

Register

Border line

None

Solid

Dotted

Borders

Paper size

11x8 1

50%

/

2

"

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Merge copy

L ayo u t

None

2-in-1

4-in-1

Paper size Set

Register

B o r d e r l i n e

None

Solid

Dotted

Cropmark

Back



Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

3 In the “Register” screen, touch the “Delete” key once again.

The screen to delete registration keys will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select item

Register

Register

Delete

End


Select item

Register

Register

Delete

End

4 Touch the registration key (1 – 3) that corresponds to the program that you want to delete. “Are you sure you want to delete?” will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Delete registration

S e l e c t t h e nu m b e r o f p r o gra m t o d e l e t e.

End

Combine

Orig. Image quality

Reduce

/Enlarge


Delete registration

S e l e c t t h e nu m b e r o f p r o gra m t o d e l e t e.

Merge Copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

End

5-56

5 Touch the “Yes” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen will be displayed again.

Inch specifications

Delete registration.

S t o p


A r e yo u s u r e yo u wa n t t o d e l e t e ?

Yes No


Delete registration.

Stop


A r e yo u s u r e yo u wa n t t o d e l e t e ?

YES NO

6 Touch the “Close” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key will be deleted from on the right side of the touch panel.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

"

11x8

Color

1 /

2

"

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

"

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

User choice

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Merge

Kopie

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge


Ready to copy.

Paper Size Set

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Merge

Kopie

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge


5-57


27. Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation [Job build mode]

The job build function enables you to scan different sets of originals into memory in separate steps and then copy them all at one time.

Each set of scanned originals is then seen as one step in the copy process and you can select different copy modes for each step

(enlarge/reduce, border erase, original type [2-sided originals, 1-sided originals or open-faced book originals]). You can choose to have a blank sheet of paper fed in between each set of originals, as well as have front and rear covers included for the full set, AND do this all during 2-sided copying!

NOTE

This procedure will assume that the color paper to be used as the front cover and the middle insert (originals “A” and “C”), as well as for the back cover, will be set on the multi-bypass, and that there is plain copy paper loaded in drawer[cassette]No.1.

●

Step 1: Accessing the “Job build” screen

1 Press the [Job build] key.

The “Job build” screen will be displayed.

A-1

A-3

2 A-1

2

1

3 C-2

B-3

B-1

B-1 C-1

(1) Using the job build mode

The following procedure shows one way of using the job build mode and explains how to perform that operation under the situation indicated in the examples below.

[Example]

<Finished copies>

(The asterisk “*” in the illustration indicates the blank sheets.)

●

Making the settings that apply to all steps

First, the settings for the 2-sided copy modes and the repeat copy mode must be made.

NOTES

• The repeat copy mode is used to enable you to make an additional number of copy sets later.

• It is also possible to select other settings and functions, as desired, besides those given in the example procedure. (See “(2)

Selecting the settings and functions” on page 5-63.)

1

A-1

1-21-1

2

2-2 2-1

<Originals>

A

1

B

1-2

1-1

C D

2

2-1

2-2

2 Touch the “1 sided/2 sided” key.

The “1 sided/2 sided” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

11x8 / ”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

1 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:0


Ready to Job build.

Set original. Press Start key.

Job Build -Step 1

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

1-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert page

Set

End

Insert blank page

5-58

3 Touch the “2 sided copy” key and then touch the “Open from left” [“Left binding”] key. Finally, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

Inch specifications

Set Ready to Job build.


1 sided/ 2 sided copy

Finished

Back

Check direction


Close

1 sided copy

2 sided copy

Open from left

Open from right

Open from top

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to Job build.


1-sided / 2-sided Copy

Finished

1-sided

Copy

2-sided

Copy

Left binding

Right binding

Top binding

Set

Back

Check direction

Check direction of original.

Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

4 Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the

“Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications



Job Build - Step1

Off

Border

Erase

None

Margin/

Centering

Basic

Auto

Select orig.size

None

Page #

Quality

Off

Modify

Copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page # : 0

End

Insert page

Print from

Rear page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Erase

Mode

None

Margin/

Imag.shift

Basic

Auto

Select size orig.

None

Page numbering

Quality

None

Modify copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Print from

Rear page



Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.

Inch specifications



Modify Copy Back Close

Off

On





Ready to Job build.


Modify copy

Off

On

Back

Set

Close

When select [On], job can be saved.

When the mode is set [On], it can

You can recall and re-print at anytime.

save a job data and reprint it anytime.

You can set a password to secure saved

And you can set that other user are not document.

able to reprint.

● Making the settings for the first original (“A” in the illustration on page 5-58.)

The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the

“Select paper” screen.

6 Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications



Job Build - Step3

11x8 / ”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

2 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:0

End

Insert page

Print from

Rear page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build -Step 3

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

2-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Print from

Rear page

5-59


7 Touch the “Bypass” key.


Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Select paper Back

Set

Close

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

”

11x8

Color

1 /

2

”

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

”

Bypass

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

”

Plain


Ready to Job build.


Select paper

Plain

Colour

Plain

Bypass

Plain

Plain

Back

Set

Close

8 Set the first original (“A”) to be copied. Press the [Start] key.


●

Step 2: Leaving the back side of the first original (“A”) blank

9 Touch the “Print from Front page” key.

Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next copy to start on the front side of the next page.

Inch specifications

Scan next original(s).

Place the originals and press start key.

Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.

Job Build - Step2

11x8

1

/

2

”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

2 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

Set

Cancel

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:1

Next copy page: Rear

Insert page

Print from

Front page

Scanning finished





Job Build- Step2

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

2-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

Set

Cancel

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 1


Insert blank page

Print from front page

Scanning finished

●

Step 3: Making the settings for the second originals (“B” in the illustration on page 5-58.)

Drawer[Cassette]No.1 is to be selected for plain paper feed under the



Inch specifications




Job Build - Step3

11x8 / ”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1 sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

2 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:2

Next copy page: Front

Set

Cancel

Insert page

Print from

Rear page

Scanning finished





Job Build - Step3

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

2-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 2


Set

Cancel

Insert blank page

Print from rear page

Scanning finished

11 Touch the key that corresponds to drawer[cassette] No. 1.


Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Select paper Back

Set

Close

11x8 1 /

2

”

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

”

Color

11x8 1 /

2

”

Plain

Bypass

Plain

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

”


Ready to Job build.


Select paper

Plain

Colour

Plain

Bypass

Plain

Plain

Back

Set

Close

12 Set the second originals (“B”) to be copied. Press the [Start] key.


5-60

●

Step 4: Making the settings for the third original (“C” in the illustration on page 5-58.)




Inch specifications




Job Build - Step4

11x8 1 /

2

”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

2 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:4


Set

Cancel

Insert page

Print from

Rear page

Scanning finished





Job Build- Step4

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

2-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 4


Set

Cancel

Insert blank page


Scanning finished



Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Select paper Back

Set

Close

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

”

11x8

Color

1 /

2

”

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

”

Bypass

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

”

Plain


Ready to Job build.


Select paper

Plain

Colour

Plain

Bypass

Plain

Plain

Back

Set

Close

15 Set the third original (“C”) to be copied. Press the [Start] key.

Scanning of the original will start.


●

Step 5: Leaving the back side of the third original (“C”) blank

16 Touch the “Print from Front page” key.

Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next copy to start on the front side of the next page.

Inch specifications




Job Build - Step5

11x8 / ”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

2 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

Set

Cancel

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:5


Insert page

Print from

Front page

Scanning finished





Job Build - Step5

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

2-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

Set

Cancel

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 5


Insert blank page

Print from front page

Scanning finished

● Step 6: Making the settings for the fourth originals (“D” in the illustration on page 5-58.)

Drawer[Cassette] No.1 is to be selected for plain paper feed under the “Select paper” screen.


Inch specifications




Job Build - Step6

11x8 / ”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

2 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:6


Set

Cancel

Insert page

Print from

Rear page

Scanning finished





Job Build - Step6

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

2-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 6


Set

Cancel

Insert blank page


Scanning finished

5-61


18 Touch the key that corresponds to drawer[cassette] No. 1.


Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Select paper Back

Set

Close

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

”

11x8

Color

1 /

2

”

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

”

Bypass

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

”

Plain


Ready to Job build.


Select paper

Plain

Colour

Plain

Bypass

Plain

Plain

Back

Set

Close

19 Set the fourth originals (“D”) to be copied. Press the [Start] key.


● Step 7: Making the settings for a blank rear cover




Inch specifications




Job Build - Step7

11x8 1 /

2

”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

2 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:8


Set

Cancel

Insert page

Print from

Rear page

Scanning finished





Job Build - Step7

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

2-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 8


Set

Cancel

Insert blank page


Scanning finished



Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Select paper Back

Set

Close

11x8 1 /

2

”

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

”

Color

11x8 1 /

2

”

Plain

Bypass

Plain

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

”


Ready to Job build.


Select paper

Plain

Colour

Plain

Bypass

Plain

Plain

Back

Set

Close

22 Touch the “Insert page” [“Insert blank page”] key.

Inch specifications




Job Build - Step7

11x8 / ”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

2 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

Set

Cancel

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:8


Insert page

Print from

Rear page

Scanning finished





Job Build - Step7

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

2-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

Set

Cancel

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 8


Insert blank page


Scanning finished

23 The job build set-up procedure is complete. Touch the

“Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.

Inch specifications




Job Build - Step8

11x8

1

/ ”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

2 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

Set

Cancel

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:10


Insert page

Print from

Rear page

Scanning finished





Job Build - Step8

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

2-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 10


Set

Cancel

Insert blank page


Scanning finished

5-62

24 If there are no problems with the copy set you made, then you can use the repeat copy mode to make any additional number of copy sets as desired (see “(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode” on page 5-44).

(2) Selecting the settings and functions

1 Selecting the paper

This procedure selects the size of the copy paper.

1 With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the

“Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

11x8 1 /

2

”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

1 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:0

End

Insert page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build -Step 1

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

1-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

2 Touch the key that corresponds to the drawer[cassette] which contains the desired size of copy paper, and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.

Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Select paper Back

Set

Close

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

”

11x8

1

/

2

”

Color

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

”

Bypass

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

”

Plain


Ready to Job build.


Select paper

Plain

Colour

Plain

Bypass

Plain

Plain

Back

Set

Close


2 Specifying the type of originals

This procedure specifies the type of originals being copied between

1-sided, 2-sided and open-faced.


“Original type” key. The “Original type” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

11x8 / ”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

1 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:0

Set

End

Insert page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build -Step 1

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

1-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

2 Select between “1 sided”, “2 sided” and “Book”, in accordance with the originals being copied.

Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Original type

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

1 sided

2 sided

Book Rear

Left top corner


Ready to Job build.


Original type

1 sided

2-sided

Book

Set

Back Close

Check direction


Back Edge

Left top corner

NOTES

• If you selected “1 sided”, verify the direction in which the originals were set.

• If you selected “2 sided”, specify the binding direction of the originals and then verify the direction in which the originals were set.

• If you selected “Book”, specify the binding direction of the originals.


5-63


3 Selecting between 1-sided or 2-sided copies

This procedure selects the type of finished copies to be made between 1-sided and 2-sided.

1 With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the “1 sided/2 sided” key. The “1 sided/2 sided” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications



Job Build - Step1

11x8 1 /

2

”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

1 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:0

End

Insert page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build -Step 1

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

1-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

NOTE

The setting in regard to making either 1-sided or 2-sided copies can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job.

2 Touch the “1 sided” key or the “2 sided” key, as appropriate, and then select the binding direction you want for the finished copies.

Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


1 sided/ 2 sided copy

Finished

Back

Check direction


Close

1 sided copy

2 sided copy

Open from left

Open from right

Open from top

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to Job build.


1-sided / 2-sided Copy

Finished

1-sided

Copy

2-sided

Copy

Left binding

Right binding

Top binding

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

IMPORTANT!



4 Selecting how to finished up the copy sets

If the optional Document Finisher is installed on your copier, this procedure lets you select whether to staple or hole punch the finished copy sets.


“Finished” key. The “Finished” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

11x8 1 / ”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

1 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:0

End

Insert page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build -Step 1

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

1-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

NOTE

The setting in regard to how the copy sets will be finished can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job.

2 Select how you want the copy sets to be finished by touching the “Staple mode” key, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center Staple” ] key or the “Punch mode” key, as appropriate.

Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Finished

Offset

None

Staple

No cover

Staple mode

1 set

Saddle

Stitch

Punch

No cover

Punch mode

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to Job build.


Finished

Group

Group

None

None

Staple

None

Staple

Mode

1 set

1 set

Center

Staple

Punch

None

Punch

Mode

Set

Back Close

Check direction


Back Edge

Left top corner

IMPORTANT!


5-64


5 Making copies at an enlarged or reduced magnification ratio

This procedure selects the magnification ratio of the finished copies.


“Reduce/Enlarge” key. The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications



Job Build - Step1

11x8 1 /

2

”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

1 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:0

End

Insert page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build -Step 1

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

1-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

2 Select the desired magnification ratio.

If you want to have the copy magnification ratio selected automatically, touch the “AMS” key.

If you want to manually set the magnification ratio, touch the

“#keys” key and then enter the desired ratio with the keypad, or touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the displayed magnification ratio to the desired setting in 1% increments.

You can also select the magnification ratio by touching the preset zoom ratio keys at the right that corresponds to the desired ratio.

Inch specifications



Reduce/Enlarge

(25 400)

100 %

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

# keys

Back Close

AMS

100 %

400 %

200 %

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

" R 11x17"

154 %

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

" R 8 1 /

2 x14"

129 %

8 1 /

2 x11" R 11x17"

121 %

8 1 /

2 x14" R 8 1 /

2 x17"

78 %

8 1 /

2 x14" R 8 1 /

2 x11"

77 %

11x17" R 8 1 /

2 x14"

64 %

11x17" R 8 1 /

2 x11"

50 %

11x17" R 5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"

25 %


Ready to Job build.


Reduce/Enlarge

(25~400)

100 %

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

#-Keys

Back

Set

Close

AMS

100%

400%

200%

A 5

➔

A 3

141% A 4 ➔ A3

A 5

➔

A4

127%

Folio ➔ A3

106%

11x15"

➔

A3

90%

Folio

➔

A4

75%

70%

11x15" ➔ A 4

A3

➔

A4

A4 ➔ A5

50%

25%


Ready to Job build.


Reduce/Enlarge

(25~400)

100 %

Standard

Zoom

XY zoom

#-Keys

Back

Set

Close

AMS

100%

400%

200%

141%

122%

A 5

➔

A 3

115%

86%

A 4

➔

A 3

B 5 ➔ B 4

A 4 ➔ B 4

A 5

➔

B 5

B 4 ➔ A 3

B 5

➔

A 4

A 3 ➔ B 4

A 4

➔

B 5

81%

70%

50%

25%

B 4 ➔ A 4

B 5 ➔ A 5

A 3 ➔ A 4

B 4

➔

B 5



6 Specifying the direction that the originals were set

This procedure specifies the direction of the set originals.


“Orig.set direction” key. The “Orig.set direction” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications



Job Build - Step1

11x8 / ”

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

1 sided copy

1 sided/

2 sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1 sided copy-Left

Finished page #:0

End

Insert page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build -Step 1

Select paper

None

Finished

Basic

1-sided

Original type

AMS

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

1-sided Copy

1-sided/

2-sided

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

1-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

2 Touch the “Rear” [“Back Edge”] key or the “Left top corner” key, as appropriate, according to the direction of the originals.

Inch specifications

Rear

Set

Ready to Job build.


Org. set direction Back

Check direction


Close



Left top corner


Set

Ready to Job build.


Orig. set direction Back

Check direction


Close



Back Edge

Left top corner

IMPORTANT!



5-65


7 Setting the scanning density

This procedure sets the copy exposure for the finished copies.

1 Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the “Exposure mode” key. The “Exposure mode” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Density 4

Exposure mode

Text+Photo

Orig. image quality

Off

Eco Print

1 sided copy-Left

Finished page # : 0

End

Insert page

Basic Quality Edit


Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Manual 4

Exposure mode

Text + Photo

Image quality

Off

Eco Print

1-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Basic Quality Edit

2 If you want to have the copy exposure selected automatically, touch the “Auto” key.

If you want to manually set the exposure, touch the “Manual” key and then touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Exposure Mode Back Close

Auto



Ready to Job build.


Exposure mode

Auto


Back

Set

Close


8 Setting the image quality

This procedure sets the image quality according to the type of originals being copied.

1 Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the “Orig. image quality” key. The “Orig. image quality” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications



Job Build - Step1

Density 4

Exposure mode

Text+Photo

Orig. image quality

Off

Eco Print

1 sided copy-Left

Finished page # : 0

End

Insert page

Basic Quality Edit


Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Manual 4

Exposure mode

Text + Photo

Image quality

Off

Eco Print

1-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Basic Quality Edit

2 Select the image quality mode by touching the “Manual” key and then touching the “Text+Photo” key, the “Photo” key or the “Text” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Orig.image quality Back Close

Text+Photo

Photo

Text

Text+Photo : Set this mode to copy orig.

w i t h m i xe d t ex t a n d p h o t o

Photo : Add a dimensional effect of photo

Text : Copy a pencil or fine line.


Ready to Job build.


Image quality orig.

Text+Photo

Photo

Text

Back

Text+Photo: Set this mode to copy original mixed (text & photo).

Photo: Add a dimensional effect of photo.

Text : Copy pencil & fine line clearly.

Set

Close


5-66

9 Turning the eco print mode ON

This procedure allows you to turn the eco print mode ON in order to save on toner use.

1 Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the “Eco Print” key. The “Eco Print” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications



Job Build - Step1

Density 4

Exposure mode

Text+Photo

Orig. image quality

Off

Eco Print

1 sided copy-Left

Finished page # : 0

End

Insert page

Basic Quality Edit


Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Manual 4

Exposure mode

Text + Photo

Image quality

Off

Eco Print

1-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Basic Quality Edit

NOTE

The setting in regard to whether or not to use the eco print mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job.

2 Touch the “On” key to turn the eco print mode ON.

Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Eco Print

Set

Back Close

Eco Print

I t i s p o s s i bl e t o r e d u c e t o n e r c o n s u m p t i o n .

I m a g e i s a l i t t l e l i g h t .

Eco Print i s s av i n g t o n e r c o n s u m p t i o n , a n d i t i s e c o n o m i c a l l y.

Off On


Set

Ready to Job build.


Eco Print Back Close

E c o P r i n t

To n e r c o n s u m p t i o n c a n b e r e d u c e d .

I m a g e r e s o l u t i o n r e d u c e d .

E c o P r i n t e n a bl e s t o n e r c o n s u m p t i o n r e d u c t i o n .

Off On


0 Selecting the sheet erase mode

This procedure selects the sheet erase mode in order to erase the shadows, lines, etc., that can occur around the edges of copies.


“Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key. The “Border Erase”

[“Erase Mode”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications



Job Build - Step1

Off

Border

Erase

None

Margin/

Centering

Basic

Auto

Select orig.size

None

Page #

Quality

Off

Modify

Copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page # : 0

End

Insert page

Print from

Rear page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Erase

Mode

None

Margin/

Imag.shift

Basic

Auto

Select size orig.

None

Page numbering

Quality

None

Modify copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Print from

Rear page

2 Touch the “Sheet Erase” [“Border erase”] key and then set the desired border width.

Inch specifications



Border Erase Back Close

Erase the border shadow of original.

None

Sheet

Erase


Ready to Job build.


Erase Mode

None

Border erase

Back

E ra s e e d g e o f o r i g i n a l c o py.

Set

Close



5-67


!

Manually selecting the size of the originals

This procedure allow you to select the size of the originals manually using the touch panel.


“Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key. The “Select orig.

size” [“Select size original”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Border

Erase

None

Margin/

Centering

Basic

Auto

Select orig.size

None

Page #

Quality

Off

Modify

Copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page # : 0

End

Insert page

Print from

Rear page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Erase

Mode

None

Margin/

Imag.shift

Basic

Auto

Select size orig.

None

Page numbering

Quality

None

Modify copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Print from

Rear page

2 If you want the size of the originals to be detected automatically, touch the “Auto” key. If you want to select a standard original size, touch the key that corresponds to the desired size.

If you want to select the dimensions of the originals manually, touch the “Input size” key and then set the corresponding dimensions.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.



Select size

Input size

Auto

11x17"

8 1 /

2 x11"

11x8

1

/

2

"

8 1 /

2 x14"

5

1 /

2 x8

1 /

2

"

8

1 /

2 x5

1 /

2

"

11x15"

A 4

A 4

Back Close

User regist.

10x10"

9x9"

8x8"

12x12"


Ready to Job build.



Auto

Select size

Input size

Set

Folio

Back Close

Use regist.

215x400mm

215x400mm

215x400mm

215x400mm


@ Selecting the repeat copy mode

This procedure allow you to select the repeat copy mode so that you can make any necessary number of additional copies later.


“Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Border

Erase

None

Margin/

Centering

Basic

Auto

Select orig.size

None

Page #

Quality

Off

Modify

Copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page # : 0

End

Insert page

Print from

Rear page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Erase

Mode

None

Margin/

Imag.shift

Basic

Auto

Select size orig.

None

Page numbering

Quality

None

Modify copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Print from

Rear page

NOTES

• To make additional copies with the repeat copy mode, refer to

“(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode” on page 5-44.

• The setting in regard to whether or not to use the repeat copy mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job.

2 Touch the “On” key to select the repeat copy mode.

Inch specifications

Ready to Job build.


Modify Copy Back

Off

On


Ready to Job build.


Modify copy

Off

On

Set

Close




Back

Set

Close

When select [On], job can be saved.

When the mode is set [On], it can save a job data and reprint it anytime.

You can set a password to secure saved

And you can set that other user are not document.

able to reprint.


5-68

-

# Selecting the margin mode or the centering/image shift mode

This procedure selects the margin mode or the centering/image shift mode in order to create a margin space or center the copy image.


“Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag. shift”] key. The “Margin/

Centering” [“Margin/Imag. shift”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Border

Erase

None

Margin/

Centering

Basic

Auto

Select orig.size

None

Page #

Quality

Off

Modify

Copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page # : 0

End

Insert page

Print from

Rear page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Erase

Mode

None

Margin/

Imag.shift

Basic

Auto

Select size orig.

None

Page numbering

Quality

None

Modify copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Print from

Rear page

NOTE

The setting in regard to the margin mode or the centering/image shift mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job.


$ Selecting the print page numbers mode

This procedure selects the print page numbers mode in order to have page numbers printed on the corresponding copies.


“Page #” [“Page numbering”] key. The “Page #” [“Page numbering”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Border

Erase

None

Margin/

Centering

Basic

Auto

Select orig.size

None

Page #

Quality

Off

Modify

Copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page # : 0

End

Insert page

Print from

Rear page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Erase

Mode

None

Margin/

Imag.shift

Basic

Auto

Select size orig.

None

Page numbering

Quality

None

Modify copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Print from

Rear page

NOTE

The setting in regard to the print page numbers mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job.

2 Touch the “Margin” key or the “Centering” [“Imag.shift”] key, as appropriate.

For more detailed information on these two settings, refer to the explanation for the margin mode on page 5-6 or the centering/image shift mode on page 5-8, as appropriate.

Inch specifications



Margin/Centering Back Close

None

Margin

Centering



Ready to Job build.


Margin/Image shift

None

Margin

Image shift

Back

Reposition image to left/right or top/bottom and center image on paper.

Set

Close


2 For more detailed information on this setting, refer to the explanation for the print page numbers mode on page 5-16.

Inch specifications



Page # Back Close

None

-1-

P.1

1/n

Page # can be added on bottom of copy.


Ready to Job build.


Page numbering

None

-1-

P.1

1/n

Back

Set

Close

Page # can be added on bottom of copy.


5-69


% Selecting the location of copy ejection

If the optional Document Finisher or Multi Job Tray is installed on your copier, this procedure lets you select the location for the ejection of finished copies.


“Select of Output” key. The “Select of Output” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications



Job Build - Step1

Off

Border

Erase

None

Margin/

Centering

Basic

Auto

Select orig.size

None

Page #

Quality

Off

Modify

Copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2 sided copy-Left

Finished page # : 0

End

Insert page

Print from

Rear page


Ready to Job build.


Job Build - Step1

Off

Erase

Mode

None

Margin/

Imag.shift

Basic

Auto

Select size orig.

None

Page numbering

Quality

None

Modify copy

Tray A

Select of

Output

Edit

2-sided Copy-Left

Finished page #: 0

Set

End

Insert blank page

Print from

Rear page

NOTES

• This setting will only be displayed when the optional Document

Finisher or Multi Job Tray is installed on your copier.

• The setting in regard to the location of copy ejection can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job.

2 Select the desired location for the ejection of finished copies.

Inch specifications

Set

Ready to Job build.


Select of Output Back Close

Auto

Tray A

Tray 1

Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Select proper output tray to avoid mixing job.

You can confirm output tray with output management.


Ready to Job build.


Select of Output

Auto

Tray A

Tray 1

Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Back

Select proper output tray to avoid job mixing.

You can confirm output tray with output management.

Set

Close


5-70

Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT

FUNCTIONS

1. Document management functions

(1) What are the “document management” functions?

“Document management” functions refer to those functions that enable you to scan and save documents onto the copier’s hard disk, and then use that data for copying purposes.

Each function has it’s own separate “box” (the area where document data is saved) on the hard disk and all data for that particular function is saved into that specific box.

The following “document management” functions are available with this copier:

●

Form registration (pages 6-1 through 6-4)

You can store in a box on the copier’s hard disk, and you can then manage the use of, those images that will be used as the “form” in the form overlay mode.

If the optional Printer Kit and/or Scanner Kit is installed in your copier, it is also possible to register and store printing and scanning data, as applicable, in a box on the copier’s hard disk.

●

Shared data box (pages 6-4 through 6-8)

If you register data that will be shared by all users in the shared data box, it will be possible for each user to print out that data at their own convenience. This is useful, for example, for registering business forms and the like that are frequently used my many people. The data that you register here will be stored permanently until the procedure to delete it is performed.

●

Synergy print boxes (pages 6-9 through 6-19)

If you store multiple sets of documents in a synergy print box, you can print out up to 10 of these sets at one time. If the optional Printer Kit or Scanner Kit is installed in your copier, you can also store print and scan data in synergy print boxes and add them to the copy jobs.

(2) Form registration

1 Registering a form

Perform the following procedure when you want to register an images as a “form” for use in the form overlay mode.

NOTE

If the optional Printer Kit is installed in your copier, it is also possible to register a printout from your computer as a "form". For more detailed information, refer to the Operation Guide for your Printer Kit.

1 Set the document that you want to register as a form.

2 Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document

Management” screen will be displayed.

3 Touch the “Form register” key. The “Form reg.” [“Form registr.”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management

Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form reg.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form registr.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End

6-1

Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS

4 Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the form data.

If you do not want to register a name for the form data, go directly to the next step.

Inch specifications

Original

11x8

1

/

2

"

Register

8

1

/

2 x11"

25/10/'01 19:20

Cancel

Ready to register form(s).


Form registration

Form box

Documents

Form006

Change name

Auto

Select orig. size

Auto size

Select regi. size

Basic

100%

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2 Checking registered forms and changing form names

Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of a registered form, the size of the original document or the date and time it was stored in memory, or when you want to print out the document in order to check it. You can also use this procedure to change the registered form name.




Ready to register form(s).


Form registration

Form box

Documents

FORM006

Change name

Auto

Select size orig.

Auto size

Select regi. size

Basic

100%

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

Original Register

A4 A4

25/10/'01 19:20

Job cancel

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

NOTE


2 Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Form box”.

The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form reg.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End

5 Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”], “Select regi.

size”, “Reduce/Enlarge” and/or “Orig. set direction” keys if you want to perform the corresponding settings for the originals being used.

If you want to access the “Scanning density” key and/or the

“Orig. image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those settings, touch the “Quality” key.

If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form registr.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End

6 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the document will start.

Once the document has been completely scanned, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.

If you want to register another form, repeat steps 3 through 6.

7

6-2

Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

3 Select the form that you want to check and then touch the

“Conf/Crrt. details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key. The “Check/

Correct details” [“Check/revise details”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Close Box editing

Form

Form 005

Form 004

Form 003

Form 002

Form 001

11x8 1 /

2

"

11x8 1 /

2

"

01/04/19

01/04/19

8 1 /

2 x11" 01/04/19

11x8 1 /

2

" 01/04/19

11x8 1 /

2

" 01/04/19

001/005

Document Management - Form box

Up

Down

Order of indication

Conf/Crrt.

details

Delete


Box editing

Form

Form 007

Form 006

Form 005

Form 004

Form 003

A4

A4

A4

A4

A4

25/10/01

25/10/01

25/10/01

25/10/01

25/10/01

001/007


Up

Down

Order of indication

Check/Rev.

details

Delete

Close


NOTE

It is possible to change the order of display for the registered forms.

To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort by date” key or the “Sort by name” key, as appropriate.

3 Deleting a registered form

Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a registered form.



4 Check the displayed information.

If you want to print out the selected form, touch the “Print

Form” key.

If you want to change the name of the selected form, touch the “Change form name” key and then enter the new name.

Inch specifications

Check/Correct details Close

Item

User name

Document name

Size

Orig. set direction

Input source

Resolution

Registration date

Details

- - - - - - - - - - -

Form 001

11x17"

Back Edge

Copy

1200dpi

25/10/'01 14:06

Document Management - Form box - Box editing


Check/revice details

Item

User name

Document name

Size

Orig. set direction

Input source

Resolution

Registration date

Details

- - - - - - - - - - - -

FORM007

A4

Back Edge

Copy

1200dpi

'25/10/01 14:06

Document Management - Form box - Box editing

Change form name

Print

Form

Change form name

Print

Form

Close

NOTE


2 Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Form Box”.


Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form reg.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form registr.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End

5 Once you have finished checking the information for that form, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.

If you want to check the information for another registered form, repeat steps 3 through 5.

6 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.


3 Select the form that you want to delete and then touch the

“Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Close Box editing

Form

Form 005

Form 004

Form 003

Form 002

Form 001

11x8 1 /

2

"

11x8 1 /

2

"

01/04/19

01/04/19

8 1 /

2 x11"

11x8 1 /

2

"

01/04/19

01/04/19

11x8 1 /

2

" 01/04/19

001/005


Up

Down

Order of indication

Conf/Crrt.

details

Delete


Box editing

Form

Form 007

Form 006

Form 005

Form 004

Form 003

A4

A4

A4

A4

A4

25/10/01

25/10/01

25/10/01

25/10/01

25/10/01

001/007


Up

Down

Order of indication

Check/Rev.

details

Delete

Close

6-3


(3) Shared data box

NOTE

It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.



Inch specifications

Stop

1 Storing documents in the box

Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of documents in the shared data box.

* Up to 100 sets of documents can be saved in the shared data box.

1 Set the documents to be stored.



Form name : Form 001

This form will be deleted. Do you really want to delete it?

Yes No


Stop

Form name : FORM007

This form will be deleted. Are you sure?

Yes No

If you selected “Yes”, the selected form will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.

If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 without deleting the selected form.

5 If you want to delete another registered form, repeat steps 3 and 4.



3 Touch the “Document reg.” [“Document registr.”] key under

“Shared Data Box”. The “Document registration” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form reg.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

25/10/'01 19:20

End

Form registr.

Box

Editing

6-4

4


Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the documents.

If you do not want to register a name for the documents, go directly to the next step.

Inch specifications

Original Register

11x8

1 /

2

" 8

1 /

2 x11"

25/10/'01 19:20

Cancel

Ready to register document(s).


Document registration

Shared Data Box

Job

Job006

Change name

Auto

Select orig. size

Auto size

Select regi. size

Basic

1 sided

Original type

100%

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

2 Printing out stored documents

Perform the following procedure when you want to print out documents that are stored in a shared data box.






Form registration

Shared Data Box

Job

Job001

Change name

Auto

Select size orig.

Auto size

Select regi. size

Basic

1-sided

Original type

100%

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

Original Register

A4 A4

25/10/'01 19:20

Job cancel

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

NOTE


2 Touch the “Document printing” key under “Shared Data Box”.

The “Document printing” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form reg.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End

5 Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key, the

“Select regi. size” key, the “Original type” key, the “Reduce/

Enlarge” key and/or the “Orig.set direction” key, if you want to perform the corresponding settings.


“Orig.image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those settings, touch the “Quality” key.

If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key and/or the “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”] key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form registr.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End

6 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the documents will start.

7

Once all of the documents have been completely scanned, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.

If you want to register another document, repeat steps 3 through 6.


3 Select the documents to be printed out and then touch the

“Finish selecting” key.

Inch specifications

Cancel

Document printing

Document data box

Job 005

Job 004

Job 003

Job 002

Job 001

1

1

25/10/01

25/10/01

1 25/10/01

1 25/10/01

1 25/10/01

001/010

Document Management - Shared Data Box

Up

Order of indication

Conf/Crrt.

details

Down

Finish selecting


Job cancel

Document printing

Document data box

JOB003

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

1

25/10/01

25/10/01

25/10/01


001/003

Up

Order of indication

Check/Rev.

details

Down

Finish

Selecting

6-5


NOTE



3 Checking stored documents and changing their names

Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of stored documents, the size of the original documents or the date and time they were stored in the shared data box, or when you want to print out the first page of those document in order to check them. You can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the documents.



4 Touch the “Select paper” key, the “Sort/Finished” key and/or the “1 sided/ 2 sided” key, to perform the corresponding settings.

If you want to access the “Form Overlay” key, the “Margin” key, the “Cover Mode” key, the “Page #” [“Page numbering”] key, the “Booklet” key and/or the “Select of Output” key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.



2 Touch the “Document printing” key or the “Box Editing” key under “Shared Data Box”. The “Document printing” screen or the “Box editing” screen, as appropriate, will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form reg.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form registr.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End

6-6

3


Select the documents that you want to check and then touch the “Cont/Crrt. details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key.

The “Check/Correct details” [“Check/revice details”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Close Box editing

Document data box

Job 005

Job 004

Job 003

Job 002

Job 001

1

1

25/10/01

25/10/01

1 25/10/01

1

1

25/10/01

25/10/01

001/010


Up

Down

Order of indication

Cont/Crrt.

details

Delete

5 Once you have finished checking the information for those documents, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.

If you want to check the information for other stored documents, repeat steps 3 through 5.




Box editing

Document data box

JOB003

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

1

25/10/01

25/10/01

25/10/01

Up

Order of indication

Check/Rev.

details

Delete

Close

Down


001/003

NOTE




If you want to print out the first page of the selected documents, touch the “Print from 1st” [“Head Print”] key.

If you want to change the name of the selected documents, touch the “Change doc.name” key and then enter the new name.

Inch specifications


Item Details

User name --------------------

Document name Job005

Registration size 11x15"

Orig. set direction Back Edge page # 1

Input source Copy

Resolution 1200dpi

Registration date '25/10/01 14:39

Document Management - Shared Data Box - Box editing

Change doc. name

Print from 1st


Check/revise details

Item Details

User name --------------------


Registration size A4


Input source Copy

Resolution 1200dpi


Document Management - Shared Data Box - Box editing

Change doc. name

Head print

Close

NOTE


6-7


4 Deleting stored documents

Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored documents.

NOTE






Inch specifications

Stop

Document name : JOB 005

This document(s) will be deleted. Do you want to delete it?

Yes No


2 Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Shared Data Box”.


Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form reg.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

25/10/'01 19:20

End

Form registr.

Box

Editing

Document name :JOB002

This document will be deleted. Are you sure?

Yes No

If you selected “Yes”, the selected documents will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.

If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 without deleting the selected documents.

5 If you want to delete other stored documents, repeat steps 3 and 4.



Stop

3 Select the documents that you want to delete and then touch the “Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Close Box editing

Document data box

Job 005

Job 004

Job 003

Job 002

Job 001

1

1

25/10/01

25/10/01

1 25/10/01

1 25/10/01

1 25/10/01

001/010


Up

Down

Order of indication

Cont/Crrt.

details

Delete


Box editing

Document data box

JOB003

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

1

25/10/01

25/10/01

25/10/01

Up

Order of indication

Check/Rev.

details

Delete

Close

Down


001/003

6-8

(4) Synergy print boxes


1 Storing documents in a box

Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of documents in a synergy print box.

NOTE

If the optional Printer Kit is installed in your copier, you can also send the document data from your computer and store it in the synergy print box. For more detailed information, refer to the Operation Guide for your Printer Kit.

4 Either touch the synergy print box in which you want to register the documents, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document registration” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications


Select box No.

001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104

002 EFGH_0000002

003 IJKL_0200003

007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106

004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102

017 QRST_0200105

008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106

019 ABCD_050010

005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102

Cancel

BOX No.

(with #-key)

0 0 7

1/5

Enter

Document Management - Synergy Print Box

1

2

Set the documents to be stored.

Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document




Select box No.


002 EFGH_0000002

003 IJKL_0200003

004 MNOP_0000004

005 QRST_0000005

007

008

009

ABCD_0000101

EFGH_0000102

IJKL_0000103

012 UVWX_0000106

013 ABCD_0200101

014 EFGH_0200102

010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103

017 QRST_0200105

018 UVWX_0200106

019 ABCD_050010

020 EFGH_0500102

Job cancel

BOX NR.

(with #-key)

0 0 7

1/ 5

Enter


3 Touch the “Document reg.” [“Document registr.”] key under

“Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management

Shared Data Box Synergy Print Box Form box

25/10/'01 19:20

End

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form reg.

Box

Editing


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

25/10/'01 19:20

End

Form registr.

Box

Editing

5 Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the documents.

If you do not want to register a name for the documents, go directly to the next step.

Inch specifications

Original

11x8 1 /

2

"

Register

8 1 /

2 x11"

25/10/'01 19:20

Cancel




007

Job

Job001

Change name

Auto

Select orig. size

Auto size

Select regi. size

Basic

1 sided

Original type

100%

Reduce

/Enlarge

Quality

Back Eage

Orig. set direction

Edit





007

Job

Job001

Change name

Auto

Select size orig.

Auto size

Select regi. size

Basic

1-sided

Original type

100%

Reduce/

Enlarge

Quality

Original

A4

Register

A4

25/10/'01 19:20

Job cancel

Back Edge

Orig. set direction

Edit

NOTE


6-9


6 Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key, the

“Select regi. size” key, the “Original type” key, the “Reduce/

Enlarge” key and/or the “Orig.set direction” key, if you want to perform the corresponding settings.


“Orig.image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those settings, touch the “Quality” key.

If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key and/or the “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”] key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.

2 Combining and printing out stored documents

Perform the following procedure when you want to combine and print out documents that are stored in a synergy print box.



7 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the documents will start.

Once all of the documents have been completely scanned, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.

If you want to register another document, repeat steps 3 through 7.

8 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

2 Touch the “Document printing” key under “Synergy Print Box”.

The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form reg.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

25/10/'01 19:20

End

Form registr.

Box

Editing

3 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Document printing

Select box No.


002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105

003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106

004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101


1/ 5

Cancel

Box No.

(with #key)

0 0 7

Enter



Document Printineg

Select box No.






1/ 5


Job cancel

BOX NR.

(with #-key)

0 0 7

Enter

6-10


NOTES

• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen will be displayed.

Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the

“Enter” key.

Inch specifications

Stop

5 Touch the “Select paper” key, the “Sort/Finished” key and/or the “1 sided/ 2 sided” key, to perform the corresponding settings.

If you want to access the “Form Overlay” key, the “Margin” key, the “Cover Mode” key, the “Page #” key, the “Booklet” key and/or the “Select of Output” key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.



password ******** (Enter by #key)

Clear

Enter

007


Stop password ******** (Enter #-key)

Clear

Enter

007 Box Name ABCDEFG

• Refer to “ 7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for information on registering the password.

4 Select the document sets in order of how you want them printed. Up to 10 sets of documents can be selected.

Up to 10 sets of documents can be selected.

Inch specifications

Document printing Cancel

007 Select:

JOB005 1 WED 15:32

2

2

JOB004 1 WED 15:33 1

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

WED 15:35

WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Order of indication

Conf/Crrt.

details

Down

Select/

Cancel

Print once all data

Finish selecting


Document printing

007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK Select :

JOB005

JOB004

1

1

2

WED 15:32 2

WED 15:33 1

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

WED 15:35

WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Down

Order of indication

Check/ Rev.

details

Select/

Cancel

Job cancel

Print once all data

Finish selecting

NOTES

• It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents. To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort by date” key or the “Sort by name” key, as a p p r o p r i a t e .

• If you want to print out more than one set of documents, they must all be of the same size.

6-11


3 Printing out the full contents of a box

Perform the following procedure when you want to print out all of the documents that are stored in a synergy print box at one time.



NOTES



“Enter” key.

Inch specifications

Stop password ********

Clear

(Enter by #key)

007


Enter

Stop

2 Touch the “Document printing” key under “Synergy Print Box”.

The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form reg.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

25/10/'01 19:20

End

Form registr.

Box

Editing

3

6-12

Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Document printing

Select box No.






1/ 5


Cancel

Box No.

(with #key)

0 0 7

Enter


Document Printineg

Select box No.






1/ 5


Job cancel

BOX NR.

(with #-key)

0 0 7

Enter password ******** (Enter #-key)

Clear

Enter



4 Touch the “Print once all data” key. Print out will start.

Once printing is completed, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

Inch specifications

Document printing Cancel

007 Select : 0

Job 005 1 WED 15:32

Job 004 1 WED 15:33

Job 003 1

Job 002

Job 001

1

1

WED 15:34

WED 15:35

WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Order of indication

Conf/Crrt.

details

Down

Select/

Cancel

Print once all data

Finish selecting


Job cancel

007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK Select : 0

JOB005 1

JOB004 1

WED 15:32

WED 15:33

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

WED 15:35

WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Order of indication

Check/ Rev.

details

Down

Select/

Cancel

Print once all data

Finish selecting


4 Checking stored documents and changing their names

Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of stored documents, the size of the original documents or the date and time they were stored in the synergy print box, or when you want to print out the first page of those document in order to check them. You can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the documents.

1




3 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing” screen or the “Box editing” screen, as appropriate, will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Box editing

Select box No.






1/ 5


Cancel

Box No.

(with #key)

Enter


Box editing

Select box No.






1/ 5


Job cancel

BOX NR.

(with #-key)

Enter

2 Touch the “Document printing” key or the “Box Editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

Form reg.

Box

Editing

25/10/'01 19:20

End


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

25/10/'01 19:20

End

Form registr.

Box

Editing

NOTES



“Enter” key.

Inch specifications

Stop password ********

Clear

(Enter by #key)

007


Enter


Clear

Enter



6-13


4 Select the documents that you want to check and then touch the “Conf/Correct details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key. The

“Check/Correct details” [“Check/revise details”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Box editing

007 Select : 0

JOB005 1 WED 15:32

JOB004 1 WED 15:33

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

WED 15:35

WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Down

Order of indication

Conf/Crrt details

Delete

End

Delete all data / box

Box

Password

NOTE


6 Once you have finished checking the information for those documents, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.

If you want to check the information for other stored documents, repeat steps 4 through 6.


Box editing


JOB005

JOB004

1

1

WED 15:32

WED 15:33

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

WED 15:35

WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Down

Order of indication

Check/ Rev.

details

Delete

End

Delete all box data

Box

Password

7 Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.


NOTE




If you want to print out the first page of the selected documents, touch the “Print from 1st” [“Head print”] key.

If you want to change the name of the selected documents, touch the “Change doc.name” key and then enter the new name.

Inch specifications


Item Details

User name --------------------


Registration size 11x8

1

/

2

"


Input source Copy

Resolution 1200dpi


Document Management - Synergy Print Box - Box editing

Change doc. name

Print from 1st



Item Details

User name --------------------


Registration size A4


Input source Copy

Resolution 1200dpi


Document Management - Synergy Print Box - Box editing

Change doc. name

Head print

Close

6-14

5 Deleting stored documents from a box

Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored documents.

1




NOTES



“Enter” key.

Inch specifications

Stop

2

3

Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


25/10/'01 19:20

End

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form reg.

Box

Editing


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

25/10/'01 19:20

End

Form registr.

Box

Editing

Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be deleted, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Box editing

Select box No.






1/ 5


Cancel

Box No.

(with #key)

Enter


Box editing

Select box No.






1/ 5


Job cancel

BOX NR.

(with #-key)

Enter password ********

Clear

(Enter by #key)

007


Enter


Clear

Enter



4 Select the documents that you want to delete and then touch the “Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Box editing

007 Select : 0

JOB005

JOB004

1

1

WED 15:32

WED 15:33

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1 WED 15:35

1 WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Down

Order of indication

Conf/Crrt details

Delete

End


Box

Password


Box editing


JOB005 1

JOB004 1

WED 15:32

WED 15:33

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

WED 15:35

WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Down

Order of indication

Check/ Rev.

details

Delete

End

Delete all box data

Box

Password

NOTE



6-15



Inch specifications

6 Deleting the full contents of a box

Perform the following procedure when you want to delete the full contents of a synergy print box in one step.

Stop



Document name : Job 005

This document(s) will be deleted. Do you want to delete it?

Yes No


Stop

Document name : JOB005

This document will be deleted. Are you sure?

Yes No

If you selected “Yes”, the selected documents will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.

If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 without deleting the selected documents.

6 If you want to delete other stored documents, repeat steps 4 and 5.


Touch the “End” key once again. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

2 Touch the “Box editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


25/10/'01 19:20

End

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form reg.

Box

Editing


Select function.

Document Management


Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form box

25/10/'01 19:20

End

Form registr.

Box

Editing

3 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be deleted, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Box editing

Select box No.






1/ 5


Cancel

Box No.

(with #key)

Enter


Box editing

Select box No.






1/ 5


Job cancel

BOX NR.

(with #-key)

Enter

6-16


NOTES



“Enter” key.

Inch specifications

Stop


Inch specifications

Document Number: 10

All data in box will be deleted. Do you want to delete?

Yes No

Stop

Metric specifications password ********

Clear

(Enter by #key)

007


Enter

Stop

Stop

Document Number : 5

All data in box will be deleted. Are you sure?

Are you sure?

Yes No password ******** (Enter #-key)

Clear

Enter



If you selected “Yes”, the entire contents of the selected box will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.

If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4 without deleting any documents.


Touch the “End” key once again. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

4 Touch the “Delete all data / box” [“Delete all box data”] key. A verification screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Box editing End

007 Select : 0

JOB005

JOB004

1

1

WED 15:32

WED 15:33

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1 WED 15:35

1 WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Order of indication

Conf/Crrt details


Box

Password

Down Delete


Box editing End


JOB005 1

JOB004 1

WED 15:32

WED 15:33

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

WED 15:35

WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Order of indication

Check/ Rev.

details

Delete all box data

Box

Password

Down Delete

6-17


7 Registering a password for a box

For security and privacy purposes, you can register a password for each synergy print box. In this case, it will be necessary to enter the registered password in order to print out, check or delete any documents stored in that box. Perform the following procedure when you want to change the password settings for any box.



3 Either touch the synergy print box that you want to set the password for, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Box editing

Select box No.






1/ 5


Cancel

Box No.

(with #key)

Enter


Box editing

Select box No.






1/ 5


Job cancel

BOX NR.

(with #-key)

Enter

2 Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Select function.

Document Management


25/10/'01 19:20

End

NOTE

If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen will be displayed.


“Enter” key.

Inch specifications

Stop

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document reg.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form reg.

Box

Editing password ******** (Enter by #key)


Select function.

Document Management


25/10/'01 19:20

End

007


Clear

Enter

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Document registr.

Box

Editing

Document printing

Form registr.

Box

Editing


Clear

Enter


6-18


4 Touch the “Box Password” key. A verification screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Box editing End

007 Select : 0

JOB005

JOB004

1

1

WED 15:32

WED 15:33

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

WED 15:35

WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Order of indication

Conf/Crrt details


Box

Password

Down Delete


Box editing End


JOB005

JOB004

1

1

WED 15:32

WED 15:33

JOB003 1 WED 15:34

JOB002

JOB001

1

1

WED 15:35

WED 15:37

001/005


Up

Order of indication

Check/ Rev.

details

Delete all box data

Box

Password

Down Delete

5 Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and then touch the “Enter” key. The new password will be registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.

Inch specifications

Box Password

Enter password.

Stop

New password

Clear

(Enter by #key)

Enter

007


Box Password

Enter password

New password ********

Stop

(Enter #-key)

Clear

Enter


NOTES

• The password can be between 1 and 8 digits long.

• If you decide not to register a password for that box, touch the

“Clear” key and then, with nothing entered in the password field, touch the “Enter” key.



6-19


2. Output management functions

(1) What are the “output management” functions?

“Output management” functions refer to those functions contained in the “Print status” screen and the “Job history” screen. These functions manage printing conditions and job completion information.

Objective

When you want to know how many jobs are scheduled to be printed before yours.

Procedure

You can verify the documents that are waiting to be printed by checking the “Print status” screen.

The jobs in the list are printed in order from the top down, so you can easily see in which order your documents will be printed.

When you want to know whether or not your job (scheduled using the job reservation function) was printed.

You can verify the jobs for which printing has been completed, as well as jobs that were canceled after scanning, by checking the “Job history” screen.

If your job is not in the “Job history” screen, check the “Print status” screen. If it IS in the “Print status” screen, your job has not yet been printed.

When you want to know the status of your print job while using the printer functions of this copier and printing out from a computer.

With the “output management functions”, jobs using the printer functions of this copier and printing out from a computer are displayed just like any other copy job. These print jobs can be verified just like copy jobs by checking the “Print status” screen, and the jobs for which printing has been completed – as well as jobs that were canceled part way through – can be checked in the “Job history” screen. (A “ ” icon under the “Job” heading indicates a copy job, while a “ ” icon indicates a print job.)

When you want to check the contents of a copy or print job that is waiting to be printed.

The type of job, user name, number of originals, number of copies to be made, the date the job was scheduled, and the status of printing can all be verified in the “Print status” screen. If you need even more detailed information on any particular job, just select that job and touch the

“Conf/Crrt. details” [“Check/Correct details”] key the display the name of the job, the size of the paper it will be output to and, if it has been designated, the location of ejection of the finished copies.

Select your job in the “Job history” screen and touch the “Check details” key to find the location of ejection.

When the optional Document Finisher or

Multi Job Tray is installed on your copier, and you want to know the location of where your job was ejected.

When you want to force-print a copy or print job that is waiting to be printed immediately.

Select the job that you want to print immediately in the “Print status” screen and touch the “Move ahead” [“Move up”] key to move that job upwards to the top of the list. OR, touch the “Interrupt print” key to stop the job that is currently being printed and start print out for the selected job.

When you want to cancel a copy or print job that is waiting to be printed.

Select the job that you want to cancel in the “Print status” screen and touch the “Cancel•Delete” key. The selected job will be canceled.

(2) Display of the output management functions

Press the [Job Queue] key. The “Print status” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Print management

123

Job

124

127

128

Move ahead

Prt status

User

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

User1

User2

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Move behind

Job history

Original

100

30

2

1 interrupt print

Set

100

Registration

10/10 23:00

5 10/10 23:00

3 10/10 23:00

5 10/10 23:00

Cancel/

Delete

State

Printing

Waiting

Waiting

Waiting

Conf/Crrt.

details


Print management

Job

123

124

127

128

Move up

Prnt status

User

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Original

100

User1

User2

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Move behind

30

2

1 interrupt print

Job history

Set Registration

100 10/10 23:00

5 10/10 23:00

3 10/10 23:00

5 10/10 23:00

Cancel /

Delete

State

Printing

Waiting

Waiting

Waiting

Check/ Rev.

details

End

10/10 23:50

End

10/10 23:50

6-20


(3) The “Print status” screen

This screen displays the currently set printing conditions and the job queue of documents waiting to be printed.

1

Inch specifications

8

Print management

Job

123

124

127

128

Move ahead

Prt status

User

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Original

100

User1

User2

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

30

2

1

Move behind interrupt print

Job history

Set

100

Registration

10/10 23:00

5 10/10 23:00

3 10/10 23:00

5 10/10 23:00

Cancel·

Delete

State

Printing

Waiting

Waiting

Waiting

Conf/Crrt.

details

End

10/10 23:50

7

2 3 9 4 5 6

1 Job queue

Displays information about each job in the queue.

The job at the top of the list is that job that is currently being printed. The rest of the jobs will be printed in order from the top down.

A “ ” icon under the “Job” heading indicates a copy job, while a

“ ” icon indicates a print job.

2 “Move ahead” key

Touching this key moves the currently selected (highlighted) job upward in the job queue. A job can be moved as far as the second highest position in the list. In this case, print out for that job will begin as soon as the current job is completed.

3 “Move behind” key

Touching this key moves the currently selected (highlighted) job downward in the job queue.

4 “Interrupt print” key

Touching this key interrupts the job that is currently being printed and start print out for the currently selected (highlighted) job. (The selected job will be moved to the top of the list.)

5 “Cancel•Delete” key

Touching this key cancels the currently selected (highlighted) job and deletes it from the job queue.

1

2


8

Print management

123

Job

124

127

128

Move up

Prnt status

User

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Original

100

User1

User2

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Move behind

30

2

1 interrupt print

Set Registration

100 10/10 23:00

5 10/10 23:00

3 10/10 23:00

5 10/10 23:00

Cancel /

Delete

Job history

State

Printing

Waiting

Waiting

Waiting

Check/ Rev.

details

End

10/10 23:50

7

3 9 4 5 6

6 “Conf/Crrt.details” [“Check/Correct details”] key

Touching this key displays the “Conf/Crrt.details” [“Check/Correct details”] screen, enabling you, for example, to check the contents of, or change the number of copies to be made for, the currently selected (highlighted) job.

Inch specifications

Close

Check/Correct details

Item

User name

Job name

Orig. page

Set

Print size

Input source

Registration date

Output

Job 5


Details

1

1

--------------------

--------------------

11x8

Copy

1 /

2

"

11/01 15:31

Finisher tray A

Change

Preset

Close


Item

User name

Job name

Original

Set

Print size

Input source

Registration date

Output

Job 5

Details

1

1

--------------------

--------------------

A4

Copy

11/01 15:31

Finisher tray A

Change

Preset

7 “ M ” and “ N ” cursor keys

Use these keys to select a job from the job queue.

8 “End” key

Touching this key quits the output management function. In this case, the touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

9 “Job history” key

Touching this key switches the display to the “Job history” screen.

6-21


(4) The “Job history” screen

This screen displays the jobs for which printing has been completed, as well as jobs that have been canceled after scanning.

Inch specifications

1 4 3

Print management

Job

121

120

119

117

User

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Original

4

User3

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

7

3

10

Set Registration

5 10/10 22:45

1 10/10 22:40

5 10/10 22:37

2 10/10 22:32

Res.

Finished

Stop

Finished

Finished

Check details

Prt status Job history

End

10/10 23:50

5 2


1 4 3

Print management

121

Job

120

119

117

User

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Original

4

User3

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

7

3

10

Set Registration

5 10/10 22:45

1 10/10 22:40

5 10/10 22:37

2 10/10 22:32

Res.

Finished

Stop

Finished

Finished

Check details

Prnt status Job history

End

10/10 23:50

5 2

1 Finished job list

Displays information about each finished print job.

Finished print jobs will be displayed in a list. The list will show the print jobs in order of the most recent to the oldest, from the top down.

A “ ” icon under the “Job” heading indicates a copy job, while a

“ ” icon indicates a print job.

NOTE

Jobs that were only scanned part way through are not displayed.

2 “Check details” key

Touching this key displays the “Check details” screen, enabling you, for example, to check the contents of the currently selected

(highlighted) job.

Inch specifications

Close

Check details

Item

User name

Job name

Orig. page

Set

Print size

Input source

Registration date

Output

Job 1


Check details

Details

--------------------

--------------------

2

99

11x8

1 /

2

"

Copy

11/01 15:31

Finisher tray A

Item

User name

Job name

Original

Set

Print size

Input source

Registration date

Output

Job 1

Details

--------------------

--------------------

2

99

A4

Copy

11/01 15:31

Finisher tray A

Close

3 “ M ” and “ N ” cursor keys

Use these keys to select a job from the finished job list.

4 “End” key

Touching this key quits the output management function. In this case, the touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

5 “Print status” key

Touching this key switches the display to the “Print state” screen.

6-22

Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS

1. Copy management mode

The total number of copies made by each department can be managed using up to 8-digit department ID-codes for up to 1000 different departments. Limits for the number of copies can be changed on a department-by-department basis.

(1) What’s in the “copy management mode” screen?

4

Inch specifications

5

Management menu

Management code menu

Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

1

Default setting

2

Off

On c o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

9

6 7 8

4


5

Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct counter clear

1

Default setting

3

2

Off

On

C o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

9

7 8 3 6

7-1


1

Setting and access key

“Register/Delete” key

Description

• Registering new department ID-codes

Perform this procedure when you want to register a new department ID-code (up to 8 digits) and set the maximum number of copies that can be made under that code. Up to

1000 department ID-codes can be registered. Up to 1,000 department ID-codes can be registered. The copy limit can be set to any 1 page increment between 1 and 999,999.

A setting of “0” will enable unlimited copying. When a department reaches its acceptable copy limit, the copier will not make any more copies under that department ID-code.

• Deleting department ID-codes

Perform this procedure when you want to delete a registered department ID-code.

Reference page

7-4

7-7 2 Changing copy limits:

“Amend the number of copy” key

Perform this procedure when you want to change the copy limit registered for each department ID-code without having to delete or re-register the corresponding code.

3 Clearing copy counts:

“Counter clear” key

Perform this procedure when you want to clear the copy counts for all of the registered department ID-codes after a designated period of time. Copy counts cannot be cleared for individual ID-codes, however.

7-8

7-9 4 Checking the copy counts:

“Counter by ID-code” key

Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under each individual ID-code, as well as the total made with the copier as a whole.

5 Printing out the department

ID-code list: “Print the list” key

Perform this procedure when you want to print out a list of the number of copies made under each department ID-code.

6 Turning copy management

ON/OFF

Perform this procedure key when you want to turn copy management ON or OFF.

7 Turning print management

ON/OFF

Perform this procedure key when you want to turn print management ON or OFF

(only available when the optional Printer Kit is installed in your copier).

8 Turning error report access

ON/OFF: “Print Err. PRT.” key

Sets whether or not the “Print Err. PRT.” key will be displayed when you are using the printer functions of this copier with copy management turned ON. Turn the display of this key ON if you want to be able to print out an error report whenever printing is attempted with an unregistered department ID-code (only available when the optional Printer Kit is installed in your copier).

9 “Close” key Touch this key when you want to quit the “copy management mode” screen and return to the “Default setting” screen.

7-10

7-11

7-12

7-12

—

7-2

(2) Accessing the copy management mode settings

Perform the following procedure when you want to access the screens for each of the various copy management mode settings.

1 With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the [ ] key. The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.


3 Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.

The factory default setting for 63 cpm copiers is “6300” and for 75 cpm copiers is “7500”. If the entered code matched the registered one, the “Management code menu” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Enter the administrator number Close



2 Touch the “Management” key on the right side of the touch panel.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

End

Weekly timer

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

4 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired copy management mode setting.

The screen for that setting will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Default setting

Off

On c o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Default setting

Off

On

C o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

NOTES

• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.

(See “Changing the management code” on page 7-34.)

• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(3) Making copy management settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).

7-3


(3) Making copy management settings

Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired setting.

●

Registering new department ID-codes

Perform this procedure to register a new department ID-code

(up to 8 digits) and set the maximum number of copies that can be made under that code.

1 Display the “Management code menu” screen.

(See “(2) Accessing the copy management mode settings”.)

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

End

Weekly timer

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Touch the “ID-code Reg./Del.” key. The “Register/Delete” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Default setting

Off

On c o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Default setting

Off

On

C o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

3 Touch the “Register” key. The “New register” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu

Close Register/Delete

I D - c o d e N u m b e r o f c o py

Up

Down

Delete Register

Default setting - Management code menu


Management mode

Register/Delete


Close

Up

Down

Delete Register


4 Enter the department ID-code that you want to register

(up to 8 digits).

The department ID-code can be set to any number between

0 and 99,999,999.

Inch specifications

Management menu

Back Close New register

~

I D - c o d e

~

N u m b e r o f c o py

Default setting - Management code menu - Register/Delete

# keys

# keys

Next

Register


Management mode

New register Back Close

I D - c o d e #-Keys



#-Keys

Next

Register

5 Touch the “# keys” [“#-keys”] key to the right of the “Number of copy” field and enter the maximum number of copies that can be made under that department ID-code.

The copy limit can be set to any 1 page increment between 1 and 999,999.

NOTES

• A setting of “0” will enable unlimited copying under that department

ID-code.

• If you want to clear the registered department ID-code and enter a new code, touch the “Back” key to access the “Register/Delete” screen once again.

7-4


Inch specifications

Management menu

New register Back Close

I D - c o d e # keys



# keys


Management mode

New register

I D - c o d e #-Keys



#-Keys

Back

Next

Register

Close

Next Register

NOTE

If you want to register another department ID-code, touch the

“Next Register” and then repeat steps 4 through 6.


Inch specifications

Management menu



Up

Down

Delete Register



Management mode

Register/Delete



Delete

Up

Down

Close

Register


8 Make sure that the “On” key is selected under “copy” and then touch the “Close” key. Copy management will be turned

ON and the screen to enter your department ID-code will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Close

P r i n t e r

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Off

On c o py

Off

On

Default setting


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Off

On

C o py

Default setting

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

●

Deleting department ID-codes

Perform this procedure to delete a registered department ID-code.


(See “(2) Accessing the copy management mode settings” on page 7-3.)

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

End

Weekly timer

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

7-5


2 Touch the “ID-code Reg./Del.” key. The “Register/Delete” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu c o py

Close

P r i n t e r


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Default setting

Off

On

Off

On


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Default setting

Off

On

C o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

3 Select the department ID-code that you want to delete and then touch the “Delete” key.

“Are you sure you want to delete this ID-code?” will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu



Up

Down

Delete Register



Management mode

Register/Delete


Close

Up

Down

Delete Register


4 If you DO want to delete that department ID-code, touch the

“Yes” key.


Inch specifications

Cancel

A r e yo u s u r e yo u wa n t t o d e l e t e t h i s I D - c o d e ?

I D - c o d e

Yes No


5

A r e yo u s u r e yo u wa n t t o d e l e t e t h i s I D - c o d e ?

I D - c o d e

Yes No

NOTE

If you want to delete another department ID-code, repeat steps 3 and 4.

Cancel


6 Touch the “On” key under “copy” and then touch the “Close” key. The selected department ID-code will be deleted and the screen to enter your department ID-code will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Off

On c o py

Default setting

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Off

On

C o py

Default setting

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

7-6

●

Changing copy limits

Perform this procedure to change the copy limit registered for each department ID-code without having to delete or re-register the corresponding code.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

End

Weekly timer

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Touch the “# of copy correct” key. The “Amend the number of copy” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Default setting c o py

Off

On

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Default setting

C o py

Off

On

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


3 Select the department ID-code that you want to change the copy limit for and then touch the “correction” key.

The screen to correct the copy limit will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu

Amend the number of copy


Close

Up

Down

Correction



Management mode



Close

Up

Down

Correction


4 Use the keypad to enter the new copy limit for that department ID-code.

The copy limit can be set to any 1 page increment between 1 and 999,999.

Inch specifications

Management menu

Amend the number of copy Back Close

I D - c o d e

N u m b e r o f c o py # keys

Default setting - Management code menu - Amend the number of copy


Management mode


I D - c o d e

N u m b e r o f c o py #-Keys

Default setting - Management code menu - Amend the number of copy

Back Close

NOTES

• A setting of “0” will enable unlimited copying under that department

ID-code.

• If you want to clear the registered copy limit and enter a new limit, touch the “Back” key to return to the screen in step 3.

• If you want to change the copy limit for another department ID-code, repeat steps 2 through 4.

7-7




Inch specifications

Management menu

Close Amend the number of copy


Up

Down

Correction



Management mode



Close

Up

Down

Correction


7 Make sure that the “On” key is selected under “copy” and then touch the “Close” key. Copy management will be turned

ON and the screen to enter your department ID-code will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Off

On c o py

Default setting

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Off

On

C o py

Default setting

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

●

Clearing copy counts

Perform this procedure to clear the copy counts for all of the registered department ID-codes after a designated period of time.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

End

Weekly timer

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Touch the “Counter clear” key.

A message asking you to confirm whether or not you really want to clear all copy counts will appear.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Default setting

Off

On c o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Default setting

Off

On

C o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

7-8

3 If you DO want to clear the copy counts, touch the “Yes” key.

If you do NOT want to clear the counts, touch the “No” key.


Inch specifications

Cancel

D e l e t e t h e c o u n t e d nu m b e r fo r t h i s I D - c o d e. A r e yo u s u r e ?

A l l d e p t . t o t a l

Yes No


Cancel

D e l e t e t h e c o u n t e d nu m b e r fo r t h i s I D - c o d e. A r e yo u s u r e ?

To t a l I D - c o d e s

Yes No


●

Checking the copy counts

Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under each individual ID-code, as well as the total made with the copier as a whole.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

End

Weekly timer

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer 4 Touch the “On” key under “copy” and then touch the “Close” key. The copy counts will all be cleared and the screen to enter your department ID-code will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Off

On c o py

Default setting

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Off

On

C o py

Default setting

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

2 Touch the “Counter by ID-code” key. The “Overview by department” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Default setting

Off

On c o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Default setting

Off

On

C o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

7-9


3 Check the total number of copies made under each department ID-code, as desired as well as the total made with the copier as a whole.

Inch specifications

Management menu

Overview by department

A l l d e p t . t o t a l

I D - c o d e C o u n t e r I D - c o d e C o u n t e r I D - c o d e C o u n t e r

Close

Up

Down



Management mode

Overview by department

To t a l I D - c o d e s

I D - c o d e C o u n t e r I D - c o d e C o u n t e r I D - c o d e C o u n t e r


Close

Up

Down

●

Printing out the department ID-code list

Perform this procedure to print out a list of the number of copies made under each department ID-code.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

End

Weekly timer

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

NOTE

When there are more than 15 department ID-codes registered, touch the “

▼

Down” key in order to displayed the next set of 15 IDcodes.


5 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return to the “Default setting” screen.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Default setting

Off

On c o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Default setting

Off

On

C o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

NOTE

• Inch specification

Make sure that 11" x 8

1/2

" size paper is loaded in one of the drawers[cassettes]. If 11" x 8

1/2

" size paper is NOT loaded in one of the drawers[cassettes], a screen requesting that you attempt to print again will be displayed during the procedure. In this case, select another paper size.

• Metric specification

Make sure A4 size paper is loaded in one of the drawers[cassettes].

If A4 size paper is NOT loaded in one of the drawers[cassettes], a screen requesting that you attempt to print again will be displayed during the procedure. In this case, select another paper size.

2 Touch the “Print the list” key.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Default setting


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Default setting

Off

On c o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

Off

On

C o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

7-10

The “Printing report.” screen will be displayed and printing of the department ID-code list will start.

Inch specifications

Printing report.


Cancel

8 1 /

2 x11"

1 sided


Printing report

O r i g i n a l C o u n t / s e t

1-sided

Sort

Plain

O u t p u t

Cancel

NOTE

If you want to cancel print out of the department ID-code list, touch the “Cancel” key.

Once print out is completed, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Default setting c o py

Off

On

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Default setting

C o py

Off

On

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

3 Touch the “Close” key.


●

Turning copy management ON/OFF

Perform this procedure to turn copy management ON or OFF.

1 Make sure you have performed all of the appropriate settings on pages 7-3 through 7-11.

2 Touch the “On” key or the “Off” key in the “Management code menu” screen to turn copy management ON or OFF, as desired.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Close

P r i n t e r

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Off

On c o py

Off

On

Default setting


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Off

On

C o py

Default setting

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

If you turned copy management ON, the screen to enter your department ID-code will be displayed.

7-11


●

Turning print management ON/OFF (only available when the optional Printer Kit is installed in your copier)

Perform this procedure to turn print management ON.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

End

Weekly timer

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

●

Turning error report access ON/OFF (only available when the optional Printer Kit is installed in your copier)

Perform this procedure to turn the display of the “Print Err. PRT.” key which allows you to print out an error report whenever printing is attempted with an unregistered department ID-code - ON or OFF.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

End

Weekly timer

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Touch the “On” key or the “Off” key under “Printer” screen to turn print management ON or OFF, as desired.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

c o py

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Off

On

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

Default setting


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

C o py


Off

On

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

Default setting



2 Make sure that the “On” key is selected under “Printer”, and then touch the “Print Err. PRT.” key. The “Print error report” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Management menu


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.

# of copy correct

Counter clear

Default setting

Off

On c o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r


Management mode


Counter by ID-code

Print the list

Print

Err. PRT.

ID-code

Reg./Del.


Default setting

Off

On

C o py

Off

On

Close

P r i n t e r

7-12

3 Touch the “On” key or the “Off” key to turn the display of the

“Print Err. PRT.” key ON or OFF, as desired.

Inch specifications

Management menu

Print Error report Back Close

Off

On



Management mode

Print Error report

Off

On


Back Close



NOTE

If you turn the display of the “Print Err. PRT.” key ON and then attempt to print using an incorrect department ID-code, “Department code mismatch.” will appear and printing will not be possible. In this case, touch the “Cancel” key. The print job will be canceled and an error report will be printed out.

Inch specifications

Department code mismatch.

O u t p u t C o u n t / S e t

Job 8

11x8

1

/

2

"

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

"

Color

11x8

1

/

2

"

Plain

APS

Bypass

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

"

1 sided

Plain


Department code mismatch.

Cancel

Continue

Stopping print

C o u n t / S e t O u t p u t

Job 8

Plain

Colour

Plain

APS

Bypass

Plain

1-sided

Plain

Cancel

Continue

Stopping print


(4) Making copies when copy management is turned ON

When copy management is turned ON, it will only be possible to perform copy operations after using the keypad to enter one of the registered department ID-codes.

IMPORTANT!

After you have finished copying, BE SURE to press the [Management] key in order to activate copy management once again. In this case, the “Enter ID-code” screen will be displayed.

1 Use the keypad to enter your designated department IDcode and then touch the “Enter” key.

The content of the “Basic” tab will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Enter ID-code.


Enter ID-code.

Clear

Clear

Enter

Enter

NOTES

• To reenter a mistaken department ID-code, touch the “Clear” key.

• If the entered ID-code does not match a registered one, an error alarm will sound. In this case, enter a viable department ID-code.

7-13


2 Make copies as desired using the normal procedure.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

11x8 1 /

2

"

Color

11x8

1

/

2

"

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduce

/Enlarge


Ready to copy.

Paper Size Set

Plain

Colour

Plain

Basic

APS

Bypass

Plain

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure mode

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

3 Once you have finished copying, Press the [Management] key.

7-13-1


2. Weekly timer

Power to the copier can be turned ON and OFF automatically at specified times on each day of the week between Monday and Sunday.

Set the copier to be turned ON early so that it is warmed up and ready for the start of work in the morning, and set it to be turned OFF automatically in the evening in case nobody remembers to switch it off manually.

NOTES

• When the weekly timer is turned ON, do NOT remove the power plug from its power source and be sure to leave the main switch ON ( | ) as well.

• In order to have the weekly timer operate properly, make absolutely certain that the settings for the date and time are correct.

(1) Settings for the weekly timer

Setting

●

Programming the weekly timer

Description

Perform this procedure when you want to register the times at which the copier is to be turned ON and OFF during each day of the week. If you leave the main switch ON ( | ), the copier will be turned ON and OFF automatically at the times scheduled for each individual day. You can also set the timer to leave the copier ON or OFF all day for any day of the week.

Reference page

7-15

●

Canceling the timer function temporarily

It is possible to cancel the timer setting temporarily (only for the next time that day comes) for any specified day.

Perform this procedure when the copier is to be out of use for any full day (holiday, etc.) outside of the normal weekly schedule. In this case, it is necessary to cancel the timer function in advance for the day in question. The copier will then remain OFF for that whole day but, on the same day of the following week, the timer will resume turning the copier ON and OFF at the times originally registered.

● Turning the weekly timer ON/OFF

Perform this procedure when the weekly timer function is not required and you want to turn it OFF.

7-16

7-17

(2) Accessing the weekly timer settings

Perform the following procedure when you want to access the screens for each of the weekly timer settings.


2 Touch the “Weekly timer” [“Week timer”] key on the right side of the touch panel.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language Management

Bypass setting

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language Management

Bypass setting

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

7-14



The factory default setting for 63 cpm copiers is “6300” and for 75 cpm copiers is “7500”. If the entered code matched the registered one, the “Weekly timer” [“Week timer”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications


4



Touch the key that corresponds to the desired weekly timer setting.

Inch specifications

Weekly timer

Weekly timer

Day of the week

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

00:00-ON

03:00-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

All day-OFF Change #

Up

Down

Close

Weekly timer

Off

On


Week timer

Week timer

Day of the week

Monday TUESDAY

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF


Up

Down

Close

Week timer

Off

On

NOTES



• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(3) Making weekly timer settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).

(3) Making weekly timer settings


●

Programming the weekly timer

Perform this procedure to register the times at which the copier is to be turned ON and OFF during each day of the week, or whether it will be left ON or OFF all day on any of those days.

1 Select the day of the week that you want to set the ON and

OFF times for and then touch the “Change #” key.

The setting screen for the selected day will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Weekly timer

Weekly timer

Day of the week

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

00:00-ON

03:00-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF


Up

Down

Close

Weekly timer

Off

On


Week timer

Week timer

Day of the week

Monday TUESDAY

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF


Up

Down

Close

Week timer

Off

On

2 If you want to set the time (hour and minutes) that the copier will be turned ON and OFF during that day, touch the “Select work time” key and then adjust the “SW ON” and “SW OFF” times as desired.

Inch specifications

Close

Cancel

Monday

Set the timer to turn on main SW on/off in a day.

By selectiong "Cancel", set time is invalided once.

Select work time

All day

-OFF

All day

-ON

SW ON 8:30 SW OFF

If On/Off mode is set at same time, main SW will turn off.

Default setting - Weekly timer

19:45

Back

Off

On


Monday

Set timer to turn main SW on/off for one day.

By selecting "Cancel", set time is invalided once.

Select work time

All day

-OFF

All day

-ON

SW ON 08:30 SW OFF

If On/Off is set to same time, main SW will turn off.

Default setting- Week timer

19:45

Back

Off

On

Close

Cancel

7-15

If you want to have the copier left ON all day on that day, touch the “All day-ON” key.

Inch specifications

Back Close

Cancel

Monday



Select work time

All day

-OFF

All day

-ON



Off

On


Monday



Select work time

All day

-OFF

All day

-ON



Back

Off

On

Close

Cancel

If you want to have the copier left OFF all day on that day, touch the “All day-OFF” key.

Inch specifications

Back Close

Cancel

Monday



Select work time

All day

-OFF

All day

-ON



Off

On


Monday



Select work time

All day

-OFF

All day

-ON



Back

Off

On

Close

Cancel

3 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the

“Weekly timer” [“Week timer”] screen.

NOTES

• Either the set ON/OFF times, “All day-ON” or “All day-OFF” will be displayed next to the corresponding date according to the setting you made.

• If you want to set the ON/OFF times for another day, repeat steps

1 through 3.


4 Touch the “On” key at the bottom right of the touch panel, and then touch the “Close” key. The timer will be turned ON with the registered settings and the touch panel will return to the “Default setting” screen.

Inch specifications

Weekly timer

Weekly timer

Day of the week

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

00:00-ON

03:00-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF


Up

Down

Close

Weekly timer

Off

On


Week timer

Week timer

Day of the week

Monday TUESDAY

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF


Up

Down

Close

Week timer

Off

On

●

Canceling the timer function temporarily

Perform this procedure to turn the copier OFF for any full day outside of the normal weekly schedule.

1 Select the day of the week for which you want to temporarily cancel the timer function, and then touch the “Change #” key.

The setting screen for the selected day will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Weekly timer

Weekly timer

Day of the week

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

00:00-ON

03:00-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF


Up

Down

Close

Weekly timer

Off

On


Week timer

Week timer

Day of the week

Monday TUESDAY

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF


Up

Down

Close

Week timer

Off

On

7-16


2 Touch the “On” key under “Cancel” at the bottom right of the touch panel.

Inch specifications

Monday



Back

Select work time

All day

-OFF

All day

-ON

SW ON 8:30 SW OFF 19:45



Off

On

Close

Cancel


Monday



Back

Select

Work time

All day

-OFF

All day

-ON

SW ON 08:30 SW OFF 19:45



Off

On

Close

Cancel


“Weekly timer” [“Week timer”] screen.

Inch specifications

Weekly timer

Weekly timer

Day of the week

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

00:00-ON

03:00-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

All day-OFF


Week timer

Week timer

Day of the week

Monday TUESDAY

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

All day-OFF

Change #

Change #

Up

Down

Up

Down

Close

Weekly timer

Off

On

Close

Week timer

Off

On

NOTE

If you want to cancel the timer function for another day, repeat steps

1 through 2.

4 Touch the “On” key at the bottom right of the touch panel, and then touch the “Close” key. The timer function will be canceled for that day and the touch panel will return to the

“Default setting” screen.

Inch specifications

Weekly timer

Weekly timer

Day of the week

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

00:00-ON

03:00-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF


Up

Down

Close

Weekly timer

Off

On


Week timer

Week timer

Day of the week

Monday TUESDAY

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF


Up

Down

Close

Week timer

Off

On

7-16-1

●

Turning the weekly timer ON/OFF

Perform this procedure to turn the weekly timer function OFF.

1 Touch the “Off” key under “Weekly timer” [“Week timer”] at the bottom right of the touch panel.

Inch specifications

Weekly timer

Weekly timer

Day of the week

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

00:00-ON

03:00-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF


Up

Down

Close

Weekly timer

Off

On


Week timer

Week timer

Day of the week

MONDAY

TUESDAY

WEDNESDAY

THURSDAY

FRIDAY

Default setting

Setting mode

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

00:00-ON

03:00-OFF

08:30-ON 19:45-OFF

All day-OFF CHANGE #

Up

Down

Close

Week timer

Off

On

2 Touch the “Close” key.

The weekly timer function will be turned OFF and the touch panel will return to the “Default setting” screen.


7-17


3. Default settings

The state that the copier enters at the end of warm-up or when the [Reset] key is pressed is called the “initial mode”. The modes, functions and other settings that are automatically pre-set for the initial mode are called “default settings”. These default settings are separated into two categories:

“Copy defaults” and “Machine defaults” and can be changed as desired to suit your copying needs.

(1) Machine default settings

The following table indicates the machine default settings available in this copier. Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the most effective use of your copier.

Default setting Description Available settings

Factory setting

Reference page

Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF

On / Off On 7-22

Paper size

(drawer[cassette] No.2

& No.3)

If the paper in one drawer[cassette] runs out during copying, the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function will switch paper feed from the empty drawer[cassette] to another drawer[cassette] that contains the same size of paper in the same orientation for uninterrupted copying. To enable this function, it is necessary to turn the related setting “On”.

In order to prevent a drawer[cassette] that holds a different type of paper from being switched to when the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function is turned ON, it is necessary to select “Feed same paper type” as well.

• Inch specification copiers

Sets the size of paper that is loaded in drawers[cassettes] No.2 and No.3.

If you want the size to be detected automatically, select

“Auto Detection” (Automatic size detection). If you want to manually set the size of paper, select “Standard sizes”.

<If you select “Auto Detection”>

You can also select the desired unit of measurement:

“Inch” or “Centimeter”.

<If you select “Standard sizes”>

You can then select the paper size.

All types of paper /

Feed same paper type

Auto Detection /

Standard sizes

Inch

Centimeter

All types of paper

Auto Detection

Inch

– – –

7-23

• Metric specification copiers

Sets the size of paper that is loaded in drawers[cassettes] No.2 and No.3.

You can then select the paper size.

A3

A4

A4R

A5R

B4

B5

B5R

Folio

11 x 17

8

1/2

x 14

11 x 8

1/2

8

1/2

x 11

5

1/2

x 8

1/2

8

1/2

x 13

A3

A4

A4R

A5R

B4

B5

B5R

Folio

11 x 17

8

1/2

x 14

11 x 8

1/2

8

1/2

x 11

5

1/2

x 8

1/2

8

1/2

x 13

A4

7-18



Paper type

(drawer[cassette] No.1 -

No. 4)

Sets and then displays the type of paper that is loaded in drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4.

* The drawer[cassette] No.4 setting will only be displayed when the optional Side Feeder is installed on your copier.

Plain

Preprinted

Recycled

Letterhead

Color [Colour]

Prepunched

Rough

Bond

Custom 1 –

Custom 8

Factory setting

Plain

Reference page

7-24

On 7-25 Custom paper type for

2-sided copying

Sets whether or not each custom paper type (custom 1 – custom 8) will be available for use in

2-sided copying.

On / Off

7-26 Paper type (for used paper)

Auto shut-off time

Auto preheat time

Sets whether or not used paper will be available for use with each custom paper type (custom 1 – custom 8).

On / Off Off

Sets the amount of time that will elapse after copying, or if no operation is performed, before the auto shut-off function engages and turns the copier OFF.

* It is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval before auto shut-off engages if you use the copier frequently, and to a shorter time if there are long intervals between use.

15 – 240 (minutes) 90 (minutes)

Sets the amount of time between the point that copying ends and the energy-saving preheat mode engages.

1 – 45, 60, 90, 120,

180 and 240

(minutes)

15 (minutes)

7-27

7-28

7-19


Default setting Description

Copy eject location Sets the location for the ejection of finished copies.

* This setting will only be displayed when the optional

Document Finisher or Multi Job Tray is installed on your copier.

Available settings

Tray A

Tray 1

Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Touch panel sound ON/

OFF

Sets whether or not the touch panel will emit a “beep” sound each time a key is touched.

On / Off

Silent mode ON/OFF The copier can be switched to a silent mode, which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished.

Turn the silent mode ON if the noise of the motor bothers you in any way.

On / Off

Day & time

Time difference

Sets the current date and time.

Sets a designated time difference.

Factory setting

Tray A

Reference page

7-29

On

Off

Year: 2000-2099

Month: 1 – 12

Day: 1 – 31

Time: 00:00 – 23:59

Year: ‘00

Month: 01

Day: 01

Time: 00:00

+12:00 – -12:00 00:00

7-30

7-31

7-32

7-33

63 cpm copiers

: 6300

75 cpm copiers

: 7500

7-34 Changing the management code

Changes the management code that is used by the copy manager.

IMPORTANT:

If you change the management code from its factory default, be sure to keep some sort of record of the new management code. If, for any reason, you forget the registered management code, you will need to contact your service representative.

0000 – 9999

Auto shut-off ON/OFF Sets whether or not to have the auto shut-off function automatically turn the main switch OFF a certain amount of time after copying, or if no operation has been performed on the copier during that time.

* If auto shut-off interferes with your copying operations, turn this function OFF. However, it is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval until auto shutoff engages before you actually turn it OFF.

On / Off On 7-35

7-20

(2) Accessing the machine default settings

Perform the following procedure when you want to access the screens for each of the various machine default settings.

1 With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the [ ] key.

The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.

2 Touch the “Machine default” key on the left side of the touch panel.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


4 If the entered code matched the registered one, the

“Machine default” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto drawer switching

Paper size(2nd drawer)

Paper size(3rd drawer)

Paper type(1st drawer)

Paper type(2nd drawer)

Default setting

Setting mode

On / All types of paper

Auto / Inch

Auto / Inch

Plain

Plain

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto cassette switching

Paper size (2nd cassette)

Paper size (3rd cassette)

Paper type (1st cassette)

Paper type (2nd cassette)

Default setting

Setting mode


A4

A4

Plain

Plain Change #

Close

Up

Down

NOTES



• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(3) Making machine default settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).


The factory default setting for 63 cpm copiers is “6300” and for 75 cpm copiers is “7500”.

Inch specifications




7-21


(3) Making machine default settings


●

Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to turn automatic drawer[cassette] switching ON or OFF, as desired.

1 Display the “Machine default” screen.

(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on page 7-21.)

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the “On” key to automatic drawer[cassette] switching

ON.

Inch specifications


When paper drawer is empty, switch to another one, set same size/direction paper, and continue copying.

Function Paper type

On

Off

All types of paper


Back Close

Default setting - Machine default



When paper cassette is empty, switch to another one, set same size/direction paper, and continue copying.

Function Paper type

On

Off

All types of Paper


Back Close


4 In order to prevent a drawer[cassette] that holds a different type of paper from being switched to when the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function is turned ON, touch the

“Feed same paper type” key under “Paper type”.

NOTE

If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the

“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

2 Select “Auto drawer switching” [“Auto cassette switching”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.The “Auto drawer switching” [“Auto cassette switching”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Close Machine default

Default menu






Default setting

Setting mode


Auto / Inch

Auto / Inch

Plain

Plain Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu






Default setting

Setting mode


A4

A4

Plain

Plain Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-22

●

Paper size (drawer[cassette] No.2 & No.3)

Perform the following procedure to set the size of paper that is loaded in drawer[cassette] No.2 and No.3.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Perform the step that corresponds to the specification of your copier:

<Inch specification copiers>

If you select “Auto Detecton” (automatic size detection) here, select the desired unit of measure (“Centimeter” or “Inch”) as well.

If you select “Standard sizes” (standard paper size) here, simply touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper that is loaded in that drawer[cassette].

Back Close Paper type(2nd drawer)

Select paper size.

Auto

Detection

Standard sizes

A3

A4

A4

A5


B4

B5

B5

Folio

11x17"

8 1 /

2 x14"

11x8 1 /

2

"

8 1 /

2 x11"

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"

8 1 /

2 x13"

<Metric specification copiers>

Select the size of paper that is loaded in that drawer[cassette].

Back Paper size (2nd cassette)

Select paper size.

Auto

Standard sizes

A3

A4

A4

A5


B4

B5

B5

Folio

11x17"

8 1 /

2 x14"

11x8 1 /

2

"

8 1 /

2 x11"

5 1 /

2 x8 1 /

2

"

8 1 /

2 x13"

Close

2 Select one of the “Paper size” settings

(“2nd drawer[cassette]” or “3rd drawer[cassette]”) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The screen to set the paper size for that drawer[cassette] will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting


Default menu






Default setting

Setting mode


Auto / Inch

Auto / Inch

Plain

Plain Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu






Default setting

Setting mode


A4

A4

Plain

Plain Change #

Close

Up

Down

NOTE






7-23


●

Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No. 4)

Perform the following procedure to set the type of paper that is loaded in drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper that is loaded in that drawer[cassette].

Inch specifications

Close Paper type(1st drawer)

Select and display paper type.

Plain

Preprinted

Recycled

Letterhead


Color

Prepunched

Rough

Bond

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Back

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7

Custom 8



Select and display paper type.

Plain

Preprinted

Recycled

Letterhead


Colour

Prepunched

Rough

Bond

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Back

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7

Custom 8

Close

NOTES

• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.

• The drawer[cassette] No.4 setting will only be displayed when the optional Side Feeder is installed on your copier.

2 Select one of the “Paper type” settings

(“1st drawer[cassette]” through “4th drawer[cassette]”) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The screen to set the paper type for that drawer[cassette] will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting


Default menu






Default setting

Setting mode


Auto / Inch

Auto / Inch

Plain

Plain Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu






Default setting

Setting mode


A4

A4

Plain

Plain Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-24

●

Custom paper type for 2-sided copying

Perform the following procedure to set whether or not each custom type of paper (custom 1 - custom 8) will be available for use in 2-sided copying.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Select one of the “custom” paper type settings (“custom 1” through “custom 8”) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “On / Off” key to change the setting as desired. Make sure the setting is “Off” for those types of paper that you do NOT want to be available for use in 2-sided copying.

Inch specifications

Close Select paper type(2sided)

Select paper type(s) for duplex copy.

Default menu

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7


On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Setting mode

On/

Off

Back


Select paper type(2sided)

Select paper type(s) for duplex copy.

Default menu

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7


On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Setting mode

On/

Off

Back Close


5

6

Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return to the “Default setting” screen.


2 Select “Select paper type (2sided)” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Select paper type (2sided)” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting


Default menu

Paper type(3rd drawer)

Paper type(4th drawer)


Select paper (Used Paper)

Auto shut-off time

Default setting

Plain

Plain

Setting mode

90 Minute Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Paper type (3rd cassette)

Paper type(4th cassette)


Select 'used paper' type

Auto shut-off time

Default setting

Plain

Plain

Setting mode

90Minute Change #

Close

Up

Down

7-25


●

Paper type (for used paper)

Perform the following procedure to set whether or not used paper will be available for use with each custom type of paper (custom 1 – 8).

Turning this setting ON prevents you from mistakenly trying to copy onto both sides when copying onto used paper (paper that has already been copied onto at least one side).

NOTES

• This setting will only be effective if the corresponding custom paper type (custom 1 - 8) is selected for use in one of the drawers[cassettes], or the multi-bypass tray.

Refer to “Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)” on page 7-24 for selecting the type of paper to be loaded in each drawer[cassette] and to “(1) Paper size and type” on page 7-66 for selecting the type of paper to be set on the multi-bypass tray.

• Duplex copying will not be possible when this setting is turned ON for the drawer[cassette] currently in use.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Select the custom paper setting that you want to change and then touch the “On / Off” key. Touch the “On” key to turn the used paper function ON.

Inch specifications

Close Select paper (Used Paper)

Select paper type(s) for used paper.

Default menu

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7


Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Setting mode

On/

Off

Back



Select paper type for used paper copy.

Default menu

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7


Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Setting mode

On/

Off

Back Close


5

6

Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return to the “Default setting” screen.


2 Select “Select paper (Used Paper)” [“Select 'used paper' type”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key. The “Select paper (Used

Paper)” [“Select 'used paper' type”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Machine default

Default menu





Auto shut-off time

Default setting

Plain

Plain

Setting mode

90 Minute Change #

Close

Up

Down

7-26


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu





Auto shut-off time

Default setting

Plain

Plain

Setting mode

90Minute Change #

Close

Up

Down

●

Auto shut-off time

Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will elapse after copying, or if no operation is performed, before the auto shut-off function turns the copier OFF.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed time to the desired setting (between 15 minutes and 240 minutes).

Inch specifications

Back Close Au t o s h u t - o f f t i m e

Select auto shut-off time after last setting, or when copying is done.

M i nu t e

+

–



Auto shut-off time

Select auto shut-off time after last setting, or when copying is done.

Minute


Back Close

2 Select “Auto shut-off time” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Auto shut-off time” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Machine default

Default menu





Auto shut-off time

Default setting

Plain

Plain

Setting mode

90 Minute Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu





Auto shut-off time

Default setting

Plain

Plain

Setting mode

90Minute Change #

Close

Up

Down

NOTES

• It is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval before auto shut-off engages if you use the copier frequently, and to a shorter time if there are long intervals between use.


4

6




7-27


●

Auto preheat time

Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time between the point that copying ends and the energy-saving preheat mode engages.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Select “Auto preheat time” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Auto preheat time” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting


Default menu

Auto preheat time

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference

Default setting

Setting mode

15 Minute

On

Off

30/10/'01 14:02

GMT+08:00 Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto preheat time

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference

Default setting

Setting mode

15Minute

On

Off

25 / 10 / '01 14:02

GMT+00:00 Change #

Close

Up

Down

3

4

6

Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed time to that desired (any available setting between 1 minute and

240 minutes).

Inch specifications

Back Close Auto preheat time

S e l e c t a u t o p r e h e a t t i m e l a s t s e t t i n g o r w h e n c o py i n g i s d o n e.

M i nu t e

+

–



Auto preheat time

Set the time for auto preheat mode after last setting, or when copying is done.

Minute


Back




Close

NOTES

• The setting can be made to any 1-minute increment between 1 minute and 45 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, 180 minutes or 240 minutes.


7-28

●

Copy eject location

Perform the following procedure to set where finished copies will be ejected.

NOTE

This setting will only be displayed when the optional Document

Finisher or Multi Job Tray is installed on your copier.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Select “Select Copy output mode” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Select Copy output mode” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto shut-off time

Auto preheat time

Select Copy output mode

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Default setting

Setting mode

90 Minute

15 Minute

Tray A

On

Off Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto shut-off time

Auto preheat time

Select COPY output mode

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Default setting

90Minute

15Minute

Tray A

On

Off

Setting mode

Change #

Close

Up

Down


3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location.

Inch specifications

Select Copy output mode

Set the default copy output destination

Back Close

Tray A

Tray 1

Tray 2



Select COPY output mode

Set the default copy output destination.

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Tray A

Tray 1

Tray 2


Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Back Close

NOTE






7-29


●

Touch panel sound ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the touch panel will emit a “beep” sound each time a key is touched. Select “Off” if you want to turn the sound OFF.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the “On” key or the “Off” key to turn the sound on the touch panel ON or OFF, as desired.

Inch specifications

Key sound ON/OFF

Select panel key sound mode off/on.

Back Close

On

Off



Key sound ON/OFF

Select panel key sound mode off/on.

On

Off

Back Close


NOTE



2 Select “Key sound ON/OFF” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Key sound ON/OFF” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting


Default menu

Auto preheat time

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference

Default setting

Setting mode

15 Minute

On

Off

30/10/'01 14:02

GMT+08:00 Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto preheat time

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference

Default setting

Setting mode

15Minute

On

Off

25 / 10 / '01 14:02

GMT+00:00 Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-30

●

Silent mode ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to use the silent mode which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished. Turn the silent mode ON if the noise of the motor bothers you in any way.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Touch the “On” key if you want to use the silent mode.

Inch specifications

Back Silent mode

U s e t h i s m o d e i f yo u a r e d i s t ra c t e d by m o t o r s o u n d s.

Close

On

Off



Silent mode

Shorten laser motor rotating time for before/after copying

Use this mode if you are distracted by motor sound.

Off

On


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select “Silent mode” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Silent mode” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto preheat time

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference

Default setting

Setting mode

15 Minute

On

Off

30/10/'01 14:02

GMT+08:00

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto preheat time

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference

Default setting

Setting mode

15Minute

On

Off

25 / 10 / '01 14:02

GMT+00:00 Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-31


●

Day & time

Perform the following procedure to set the current date and time.

NOTE

BE SURE to perform the “Time difference” setting prior to setting the day and time.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Select “Date/Time” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Date/Time” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto preheat time

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference

Default setting

Setting mode

15 Minute

On

Off

30/10/'01 14:02

GMT+08:00 Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto preheat time

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference

Default setting

Setting mode

15Minute

On

Off

25 / 10 / '01 14:02

GMT+00:00 Change #

Close

Up

Down

3 Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed information for each field (“Year”, “Month”, “Day” and “Time”) to the current time and date.

If you want the time to be automatically calculated for daylight savings time, touch the “On” key under

“Summertime”.

Inch specifications

Date/Time

Year

2001

Month

Day

10

16

Time 18:27


Back Close

Summertime

Off

On


Date/Time

Year

2001

10

Month

Day

16

Time

18:27


Back Close

Summertime

Off

On

NOTE






7-32

●

Time difference

Perform the following procedure to set a designated time difference.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed time difference to the desired setting.

Inch specifications

Back Close

Time difference

GMT+ 00 : 00



Time difference

GMT+ 00 : 00

Back Close


NOTE



2 Select “Time difference” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Time difference” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto preheat time

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference

Default setting

Setting mode

15 Minute

On

Off

30/10/'01 14:02

GMT+08:00 Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Auto preheat time

Key sound ON/OFF

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference

Default setting

Setting mode

15Minute

On

Off

25 / 10 / '01 14:02

GMT+00:00 Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-33


●

Changing the management code

Perform the following procedure to change the management code used by the copy manager.

IMPORTANT!

If you change the management code from its factory default, be sure to keep some sort of record of the new management code. If, for any reason, you forget the registered management code, you will need to contact your service representative.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Use the keypad to enter a new 4-digit management code.

Inch specifications

Management code change

A bl e t o c h a n g e m a n a g e m e n t c o d e. ( # key )



Change MGMT code with #

A bl e t o c h a n g e m a n a g e m e n t c o d e. ( # key )

Back Close

Back Close


NOTE






2 Select “Management code change” [“Change MGMT code with #”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Management code change” [“Change MGMT code with

#”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference


Auto shut-off

Default setting

Setting mode

Off

2001/10/30 14:02

GMT+08:00

6300

On

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference


Auto shut-off

Default setting

Setting mode

Off

30/10/'01 14:02

GMT+08:00

6300

On Change #

Close

Up

Down

7-34

●

Auto shut-off ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to have the auto shut-off function automatically turn the main switch OFF a certain amount of time after copying, or if no operation has been performed on the copier during that time.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Select “Auto shut-off” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Auto shut-off” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting


Default menu

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference


Auto shut-off

Default setting

Setting mode

Off

2001/10/30 14:02

GMT+08:00

6300

On Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Machine default

Default menu

Silent mode

Date/Time

Time difference


Auto shut-off

Default setting

Setting mode

Off

30/10/'01 14:02

GMT+08:00

6300

On Change #

Close

Up

Down


3 Touch the “On” key if you want to use the auto shut-off function.

Inch specifications

Auto shut-off

S e l e c t a u t o s h u t - o f f m o d e a f t e r l a s t s e t t i n g o r w h e n c o py i n g i s d o n e.

Back Close

On

Off

4

6

D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - M a c h i n e d e fa u l t


Auto shut-off

S e l e c t a u t o s h u t - o f f m o d e a f t e r l a s t s e t t i n g o r w h e n c o py i n g i s d o n e.

On

Off


Back




Close

NOTES

• If auto shut-off interferes with your copying operations, turn this function OFF. However, it is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval until auto shut-off engages before you actually turn it OFF.


7-35


(4) Copy default settings

The following table indicates the copy default settings available in this copier. Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the most effective use of your copier.


Exposure mode Manual / Auto

Factory setting

Manual

Reference page

7-40 Selects between auto exposure and manual exposure as the default copy exposure mode in the initial mode.

7-41 Exposure adjustment step

Changes the incremental step to be used during adjustment of the copy exposure.

Original quality

1 step / 0.5 step

Determines the default setting that will be used for the image quality in the initial mode.

Text+Photo / Text /

Photo

1 step

Text+Photo

Custom original size

(setting No.1 – No.4)

Sets the custom paper sizes (settings No.1 through

No.4) that can be used under the original size selection mode.

Off / On Off

Inch specification

Width: 2 – 11

5/8

(inches)

Length: 2 – 17 (inches)


Width: 50 – 297 (mm)

Length: 50 – 432 (mm)

– – –

7-42

7-43

Off 7-44 Eco print mode ON/OFF Determines whether the Eco print mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. In this case, the amount of toner that is used to make the copies will be reduced, and images will be printed out relatively lighter than normal.

On / Off

Black-line correction

ON/OFF

Turns black-line correction ON. If black lines appear on copies when you feed originals from the Document Processor (but they do not exist on the originals themselves), this function will make them less apparent.

Off / On

Paper selection Sets whether the copier will automatically select the same size of copy paper as the original once an original is set (APS: auto paper selection mode), or whether the drawer[cassette] selected “Default drawer” [“Default cassette”] setting will be automatically selected.

APS / Default drawer[cassette]

Paper type (auto paper selection mode)

Sets which types of paper can be selected under the auto paper selection mode.

* It is possible to select the type of paper that has been designated for the drawer[cassette] currently in use.

Off / On

Plain

Preprinted

Recycled

Letterhead

Color [Colour]

Prepunched

Rough

Bond

Custom 1 –

Custom 8

Off

APS

Off

– – –

7-45

7-46

7-47

7-36


Default setting Description Available settings Factory setting

1st paper Default drawer[cassette] Sets one drawer[cassette] that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that drawer[cassette].

* It is NOT possible to select the multi-bypass tray as the default drawer[cassette].


Cover drawer[cassette]

1st paper

2nd paper

3rd paper

4th paper

Sets which drawer[cassette] will be used to feed the cover sheets in the cover mode, the booklet/stitching mode and the book to booklet mode.


1st paper

2nd paper

3rd paper

4th paper

Bypass

Default magnification ratio

Auto exposure adjustment

Sets whether or not the auto magnification selection mode will be used to automatically calculate the appropriate magnification ratio when you select the size of copy paper.

Adjusts the overall exposure level for the auto exposure mode.

Manual / AMS

-3 – +3

Bypass

Manual

Standard setting

Reference page

7-48

7-49

7-50

7-51

Standard setting 7-52 Auto exposure adjustment (OCR)

Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode)

Adjusts the overall exposure level for scanning with

OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software when using the optional scanner functions of this copier.

-3 – +3

Adjusts the median exposure value when the text+photo mode is selected for the image quality.

-3 – +3

Manual exposure adjustment (text mode)

Adjusts the median exposure value when the text mode is selected for the image quality.

Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode)

Adjusts the median exposure value when the photo mode is selected for the image quality.

-3 – +3

-3 – +3

Sort mode

Auto Rotation mode

Margin width

Determines whether or not the Sort mode will be the default setting in the initial mode.

Sort:On / Sort:Off

Rotate / No Rotate Determines whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. If Auto

Rotation is turned ON, the image will be automatically rotated even if the orientation of the original is different from that of the paper loaded in the drawers[cassettes].

Determines the default value of the location and width of the margins in the margin mode.

Inch specification

0 – 3/4 (inches)


0 – 18 (mm)

Standard setting

Standard setting

Standard setting

Sort:On

Rotate

Inch specification

Left: 1/4 (inches)

Top: 0 (inches)


Left: 6 (mm)

Top: 0 (mm)

7-53

7-54

7-55

7-56

7-57

7-58

7-37


Default setting

Erased border width

Description Available settings

Determines the default value for the width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes.

Inch specification

Outside border:

0 – 3/4 (inches)

Center area:

0 – 1

1/2

(inches)


Outside border:

0 – 18 (mm)

Center area:

0 – 36 (mm)

Factory setting

Inch specification

Outside border:

1/4 (inches)

Center area:

1/4 (inches)


Outside border:

6 (mm)

Center area:

6 (mm)

Reference page

7-59

Copy limit

Repeat copying ON/

OFF

Sets the limit for the number of copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time.

1 – 999

Sets whether or not to prohibit repeat copying, as well as whether or not to make repeat copying the default setting in the initial mode. Sets whether to turn the repeat copy mode ON or OFF.

Off / On

999

On

Sets whether or not to make repeat copying the default setting in the initial mode.

Off / On Off

“Job history” screen ON/

OFF

Sets whether or not the “Job history” screen will be displayed or not. Also determines the contents of the displayed information; select “On / reserved” [“On /

Reserv.job”] to have only reserved jobs (copy and print jobs scheduled during print out of another job) displayed in that screen.

Off /

On/All job /

On/reserved [On/reserv.

job]

On/All job

7-60

7-61

7-62

Registration keys ON/

OFF

Sets whether or not to allow a “Register” key to be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be registered under the registration keys.

Functions and/or modes can only be registered under registration keys through the “Register” key.

Off / On On

Customize screen layout

(Main functions)

Changes the order of the main functions and modes that are displayed in the “Basic” and the “User choice” tabs in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier.

* Up to 6 functions and modes can be listed and displayed.

Reduce/Enlarge /

Exposure Mode /

Sort/Finish /

1/2 sided /

Quality orig. /

Original size

1 Reduce/

Enlarge

2 Exposure

Mode

3 Sort/Finish

4 1/2 sided

5 Quality orig.

6 Original size

Customize screen layout

(Add functions)

Adds often-used functions and/or modes, and changes the order of their layout, in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier.

All functions and modes other than those in the

“Basic” tab and the

“main functions” in the

“User choice” tab.

7 Border Erase

[Erase Mode]

8 Cover

9 (None)

10 Proof Copy

[Test copy]

11 (None)

12 Form Overlay

13 (None)

7-63

7-64

7-65

7-38

(5) Accessing the copy default settings

Perform the following procedure when you want to access the screens for each of the various copy default settings.



4 If the entered code matched the registered one, the “Copy default” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Exposure mode

Exposure steps

Original image quality

Original size (custom1)


Default setting

Setting mode

Manual

1 step

Text + Photo

11

11

11

11

/

/

16

16 x16 x16

9

9

/

16

/

16

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Exposure mode

Exposure steps

Image quality original



Default setting

Setting mode

Manual

1 step

Text + Photo

Off

Off Change #

Close

Up

Down

2 Touch the “Copy default” key on the left side of the touch panel.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

NOTES



• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(6) Making copy default settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).



Inch specifications




7-39


(6) Making copy default settings


●

Exposure mode

Perform the following procedure to select between auto exposure and manual exposure as the default copy exposure mode in the initial mode.

1 Display the “Copy default” screen.

(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-39.)

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the “Manual” key or the “Auto” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications

Exposure mode

Select default mode of copy exposure, auto or manual.

Back Close

Manual

Auto

D e fa u l t s e t t i n g - C o py d e fa u l t


Exposure mode

Select default mode of copy exposure, auto or manual.

Manual

Auto

Default setting - Copy default

Back Close

NOTE






2 Select “Exposure mode” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Exposure mode” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Exposure mode

Exposure steps




Default setting

Setting mode

Manual

1 step

Text + Photo

11

11 /

16 x16

9 /

16

11 11 /

16 x16 9 /

16

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Exposure mode

Exposure steps




Default setting

Setting mode

Manual

1 step

Text + Photo

Off

Off Change #

Close

Up

Down

7-40

●

Exposure adjustment step

Perform the following procedure to change the incremental step to be used during adjustment of the copy exposure.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Touch the “1 step” key or the “0.5 step” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications

Exposure steps

S e l e c t s t e p o f c o py ex p o s u r e.

Back Close

1 step

step



Exposure steps

S e l e c t a d j u s t m e n t s t e p o f c o py ex p o s u r e.

1 step

0.5 step


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select “Exposure steps” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Exposure steps” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Exposure mode

Exposure steps




Default setting

Setting mode

Manual

1 step

Text + Photo

11

11 /

16 x16

9 /

16

11 11 /

16 x16 9 /

16

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Exposure mode

Exposure steps




Default setting

Setting mode

Manual

1 step

Text + Photo

Off

Off Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-41


●

Original quality

Perform the following procedure to determine the default setting that will be used for the image quality in the initial mode.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the “Text+Photo” key, the “Photo” key or the “Text” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications


S e l e c t d e fa u l t m o d e o f o r i g i n a l i m a g e q u a l i t y.

Back Close

Text + Photo

Photo

Text



Image quality original.

S e l e c t d e fa u l t m o d e o f o r i g i n a l q u a l i t y.

Text+Photo

Photo

Text


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select “Original image quality” [“Image quality Original”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Original image quality” [“Image quality Original”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Exposure mode

Exposure steps




Default setting

Setting mode

Manual

1 step

Text + Photo

11

11 /

16 x16

9 /

16

11 11 /

16 x16 9 /

16

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Exposure mode

Exposure steps




Default setting

Setting mode

Manual

1 step

Text + Photo

Off

Off Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-42

●

Custom original size (setting No.1 – No.4)

Perform the following procedure to set the custom paper sizes

(settings No.1 through No.4) that can be used under the original size selection mode.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key under the “Y (Width)” and “X

(Length)” fields to change the displayed width and length, respectively, to the desired setting.

If you do not want to register a custom original size, touch the “Off” key.

Inch specifications

Back Close Original size (custom1)

Register custom size original.

Y

( 2~11 5 /

8

)

11 11 /

16 "

Off

On

X

( 2~17)

16 9 /

16 "




Register custom size original.

Y

(50 ~297) (50~432)

100 mm X 100 mm

Off

On


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select one of the “Original size” settings (“custom 1” through

“custom 4”) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The screen to set the desired original size will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Exposure mode

Exposure steps




Default setting

Setting mode

Manual

1 step

Text + Photo

11

11 /

16 x16

9 /

16

11 11 /

16 x16 9 /

16

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Exposure mode

Exposure steps




Default setting

Setting mode

Manual

1 step

Text + Photo

Off

Off Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-43


●

Eco print mode ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the eco print mode will be the default setting in the initial mode.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the “On” key if you want to make the eco print mode the default setting in the initial mode.

Inch specifications

Eco Print

S e l e c t d e fa u l t E c o P r i n t .

Back Close

Off

On



Eco Print

Select default EcoPrint.

Off

On


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select “Eco Print” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Eco Print” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Original size(custom 4)

Eco Print

Correct. fine black line.

Selectpaper

Select paper type(APS)

Default setting

Off

Off

APS

Off

Setting mode

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copydefault

Default menu

Originalsize(custom 4)

Eco Print


Selectpaper


Default setting

Off

Off

APS

Off

Setting mode

Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-44

●

Black-line correction ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to turn black-line correction ON and make black lines, which appear on copies when you feed originals from the Document Processor (but they do not exist on the originals themselves), less apparent.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Language

Bypass setting

Machine default

Document

Management

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Touch the “On” key if you want to use black-line correction.

Inch specifications

Back Close Correct. fine black line.

This function able to be unremarkably on black line of image.

Off

On




This function able to be unremarkably on black line of image.

Off

On


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select “Correct. fine black line.” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Correct. fine black line.” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu


Eco Print


Selectpaper


Default setting

Off

Off

APS

Off

Setting mode

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copydefault

Default menu


Eco Print


Selectpaper


Default setting

Off

Off

APS

Off

Setting mode

Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-45


●

Paper selection

Perform the following procedure to set whether the copier will automatically select the same size of copy paper as the original once an original is set, or whether the designated default drawer[cassette] will be automatically selected.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the “APS” key to have the same size of copy paper as the original selected automatically, and the “Default drawer[cassette]” key to have paper fed from the designated default drawer[cassette].

Inch specifications

Select paper

S e t a u t o p a p e r s e l e c t i o n m o d e.

Back Close

APS

Default cassette



Select paper

S e t t i n g p a p e r s e l e c t m o d e.

APS

Default cassette

Back Close


NOTE



2 Select “Select paper” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Select paper” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu


Eco Print


Selectpaper


Default setting

Off

Off

APS

Off

Setting mode

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copydefault

Default menu


Eco Print


Selectpaper


Default setting

Off

Off

APS

Off

Setting mode

Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-46

●

Paper type (auto paper selection mode)

Perform the following procedure to set which types of paper can be selected under the auto paper selection mode.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Language

Bypass setting

Machine default

Document

Management

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Touch the “On” key and then touch the key that corresponds to the types of paper you want to allow to be used under the auto paper selection mode. If you do NOT want to limit the types of paper that will be available for use in that mode, touch the “Off” key.

Inch specifications

Close Select paper type(APS)

Select paper type(s) for Auto Paper Selection.

Off

On

Plain

Preprinted

Recycled

Letterhead


Color

Prepunched

Rough

Bond

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4


Back

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7

Custom 8


Select paper type(s) for Auto Paper Selection.

Off

On

Plain

Preprinted

Recycled

Letterhead

Colour

Prepunched

Rough

Bond

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4


Back

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7

Custom 8

Close

NOTES

• It is possible to select the type of paper that has been designated for the drawer[cassette] currently in use.


2 Select “Select paper type(APS)” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Select paper type(APS)” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu


Eco Print


Selectpaper


Default setting

Off

Off

APS

Off

Setting mode

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copydefault

Default menu


Eco Print


Selectpaper


Default setting

Off

Off

APS

Off

Setting mode

Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-47


●

Default drawer[cassette]

Perform the following procedure to set one drawer[cassette] that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that drawer[cassette].

* It is NOT possible to select the multi-bypass tray as the default drawer[cassette].



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired drawer[cassette].

Inch specifications

Default drawer

S e l e c t p r i o r i t y d rawe r.

Back

1st paper

2nd paper

3rd paper 4th paper



Default cassette

Select paper cassette for default setting.

1st paper

2nd paper

3rd paper


4th paper

Back

Close

Close

NOTES



2 Select “Default drawer[cassette]” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Default drawer[cassette]” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default drawer

Drawer for cover paper

Default magnification

Auto exposure adj.(Auto)

Manual exp. adj.(Mixed)

Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default cassette

Cassette for cover paper

Default mode


Manual exp. adj. (Mixed)

Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-48

●

Cover drawer[cassette]

Perform the following procedure to set which drawer[cassette] will be used to feed the cover sheets in the cover mode, the booklet/stitching mode and the book to booklet mode.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Select “Drawer for cover paper” [“Cassette for cover paper”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Drawer for cover paper” [“Cassette for cover paper”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default drawer





Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default cassette


Default mode



Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down


3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired drawer[cassette].

Inch specifications


S e l e c t d rawe r fo r c ove r p a p e r.

Back

4

1st paper

2nd paper

3rd paper


Bypass

4th paper



Select cassette for cover paper.

1st paper

1st paper

2nd paper

3rd paper


Bypass

4th paper

Back


Close



Close

NOTES



7-49


●

Default magnification ratio

Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the appropriate magnification ratio to be calculated automatically when you select the size of copy paper.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the “Manual” key or the “AMS” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications


S e l e c t d e fa u l t m a g n i f i c a t i o n m o d e.

Back Close

Manual

AMS



Default mode

S e l e c t d e fa u l t zo o m m o d e.

Manual

AMS


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select “Default magnification” [“Default mode”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the

“Change #” key.

The “Default magnification” [“Default mode”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default drawer





Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default cassette


Default mode



Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-50

●

Auto exposure adjustment

Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level for the auto exposure mode.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired.

Inch specifications


A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( Au t o )

Back Close

Lighter Darker




A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( Au t o )

Lighter

Back

Darker

Close


NOTE



2 Select “Auto exposure adj. (Auto)” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Auto exposure adj. (Auto)” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default drawer





Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default cassette


Default mode



Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-51


●

Auto exposure adjustment (OCR)

Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level for scanning with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software when using the optional scanner functions of this copier.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


Inch specifications

Auto exposure adj.(OCR) Back Close

Lighter



Auto exposure adj.(OCR)

Lighter


Darker

Back

Darker

Close

NOTE



2 Select “Auto exposure adj. (OCR)” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Auto exposure adj. (OCR)” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default cassette





Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default cassette


Default mode



Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-52

●

Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode)

Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value when the text+photo mode is selected for the image quality.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer



Inch specifications


A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( M a nu a l , Tex t + P h o t o )

Back Close

Lighter Darker




A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( M a nu a l , Tex t + P h o t o )

Back

Lighter Darker

Close


2 Select “Manual exp.adj. (Mixed)” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Manual exp.adj. (Mixed)” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default drawer





Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Default cassette


Default mode



Default setting

Setting mode

1st paper

Bypass

Manual

Standard

Standard Change #

Close

Up

Down

NOTE






7-53


●

Manual exposure adjustment (text mode)

Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value when the text mode is selected for the image quality.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Select “Manual exp.adj. (Text)” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Manual exp.adj. (Text)” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Manual exp. adj.(Text)

Manual exp. adj.(Photo)

Sort

Auto Rotation

Default margin width

Default setting

Setting mode

Standard

Standard

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 1 /

4

" 0" Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Manual exp. adj. (Text)

Manual exp. adj. (Photo)

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default setting

Setting mode

Standard

Standard

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 6mm 0mm Change #

Close

Up

Down


Inch specifications


A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( M a nu a l , Tex t )

Back Close

NOTE



4

Lighter Darker




A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( M a nu a l , Tex t )

Back

Lighter Darker

Close





7-54

●

Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode)

Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value when the photo mode is selected for the image quality.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer



Inch specifications


A d j u s t c o py ex p o s u r e d e fa u l t s e t t i n g . ( M a nu a l , P h o t o )

Back Close

Lighter Darker




A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f c o py ex p o s u r e. ( M a nu a l , P h o t o )

Back

Lighter Darker

Close


NOTE



2 Select “Manual exp.adj. (Photo)” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Manual exp.adj. (Photo)” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Close Copy default

Default menu



Sort

Auto Rotation


Default setting

Setting mode

Standard

Standard

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 1 /

4

" 0" Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu



Sort

Auto Rotation


Default setting

Setting mode

Standard

Standard

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 6mm 0mm Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-55


●

Sort mode ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Sort mode will be the default setting in the initial mode.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the “Sort:On” key if you want to make the Sort mode the default setting in the initial mode.

Inch specifications

Sort

Select default mode for sort, ON or OFF.

Back Close

Sort : Off

Sort : On



Sort

Select default mode of sort, ON or OFF.

Sort : Off

Sort : On


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select “Sort” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Sort” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default erase width

Preset limit

Default setting

Setting mode

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 1 /

4

" 0"

Border

1

/

4

" Center

1

/

4

"

999Set Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default erase width

Preset limit

Default setting

Setting mode

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 6mm 0mm

Border 6mm Center 6mm

999 Set Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-56

●

Auto Rotation mode ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Auto

Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Touch the “Rotate” key if you want to make the Auto Rotation mode the default setting in the initial mode.

Inch specifications

Auto Rotation

Select default mode for Auto Rotation, ON or OFF.

Back Close

No Rotate

Rotate



Auto Rotation

Select default mode of Auto Rotation, ON or OFF.

No Rotate

Rotate


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select “Auto Rotation” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Auto Rotation” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default erase width

Preset limit

Default setting

Setting mode

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 1 /

4

" 0"

Border

1

/

4

" Center

1

/

4

"

999Set Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default erase width

Preset limit

Default setting

Setting mode

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 6mm 0mm


999 Set Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-57


●

Margin width

Perform the following procedure to determine the default value of the location and width of the margins in the margin mode.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

2 Select “Default margin width” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Default margin width” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default erase width

Preset limit

Default setting

Setting mode

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 1 /

4

" 0"

Border

1

/

4

" Center

1

/

4

"

999Set Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default erase width

Preset limit

Default setting

Setting mode

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 6mm 0mm


999 Set Change #

Close

Up

Down

3 Touch the “ O ” key or the “ P ” key, and the “ M ” key or the “ N ” key, as desired, to change the default margins and margin widths to the desired setting.

Inch specifications

4


A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f m a r g i n w i d t h .

Front page

(0~ 3 /

4

)

0 "

Left

(0~ 3 /

4

)

1 /

4

"




Adjust default setting of margin width.

Front page

Left

(0~18)

6 mm

(0~18)

0 mm


Back

Back

Close




Close

NOTE



7-58

●

Erased border width

Perform the following procedure to determine the default value for the width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key under the “Border” and

“Center” fields to change the displayed widths to those desired.

Inch specifications

Back Close Default erase width

A d j u s t d e fa u l t s e t t i n g o f e ra s e w i d t h .

B o r d e r

(0~ 3 /

4

)

1 /

4

" C e n t e r

(0~1 1 /

2

)

1 /

4

+

–

+

–

"



Default erase width

Adjust default setting of erase width.

Border

(0~18) (0~36)

6 mm Center

12 mm

+

–

+

–


Back Close

2 Select “Default erase width” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Default erase width” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default erase width

Preset limit

Default setting

Setting mode

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 1 /

4

" 0"

Border

1

/

4

" Center

1

/

4

"

999Set Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default erase width

Preset limit

Default setting

Setting mode

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 6mm 0mm


999 Set Change #

Close

Up

Down

NOTE






7-59


●

Copy limit

Perform the following procedure to set the limit for the number of copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the copy limit to the desired setting.

Inch specifications

Back Close Preset limit

S e t o u t p u t q u a n t i t y.

~

+

S e t



Preset limit

S e l e c t c o py p r e s e t i n o n e j o b ( # key ) .

~

Set


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select “Preset limit” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Preset limit” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default erase width

Preset limit

Default setting

Setting mode

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 1 /

4

" 0"

Border

1

/

4

" Center

1

/

4

"

999Set Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Sort

Auto Rotation


Default erase width

Preset limit

Default setting

Setting mode

Sort : On

Rotate

Left 6mm 0mm


999 Set Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-60

●

Repeat copying ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to prohibit repeat copying, as well as whether or not to make repeat copying the default setting in the initial mode.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 If you want to prohibit repeat copying, touch the “Off” key. If you want to make repeat copying the default setting in the initial mode, touch the “On” key.

Inch specifications

Modify Copy

S e l e c t O N t o a c t i va t e M o d i f y C o py o r O F F t o i n a c t i va t e i t .

F u n c t i o n D e fa u l t

O f f O f f

O n O n

Back Close



Modify copy

Select ON to activate Modify Copy or OFF to inactivate it.

Function Default

Off Off

On On


Back Close

NOTE



2 Select “Modify Copy” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Modify Copy” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Close

Copy default

Default menu

Modify Copy

Job Queue Report

Display register key

Customize(Main function)

Customize(Add function)

Default setting

Setting mode

On / Off

On(All job)

On

Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Modify copy

Job Queue Report

Display"Register"key



Default setting

Setting mode

On / Off

On(All jobs)

On

Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-61


●

“Job history” screen ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to set the contents of the “Job history” screen or turn display of that screen OFF.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 If you do NOT want to display the “Job history” screen, touch the “Off” key. If you DO want to display the “Job history” screen, touch the “On/All job” key or the “On/reserved” [“On/ reserv.job”] key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications

Job Queue Report

S e l e c t O N t o a c t i va t e C o py J o b L o g o r O F F t o i n a c t i va t e i t .

O f f

O n /

A l l j o b

On/ reserved



Job Queue Report

Select ON to activate Copy Job Log or OFF to inactivate it.

Off

On/

All job

On/ reserv.job


Back

Back

Close

Close

2 Select “Job Queue Report” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Job Queue Report” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Modify Copy

Job Queue Report




Default setting

Setting mode

On / Off

On(All job)

On

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Modify copy

Job Queue Report




Default setting

Setting mode

On / Off

On(All jobs)

On

Change #

Close

Up

Down

NOTE






7-62

●

Registration keys ON/OFF

Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to allow a

“Register” key to be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be registered under the registration keys. Functions and/or modes can only be registered under registration keys through the “Register” key.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 If you want the “Register” key to be displayed, touch the “On” key. If you do NOT want it to be displayed, touch the “Off” key.

Inch specifications


S e l e c t O n e t o u c h key O n / O f f.

A bl e t o u s e R e g i s t e r key o n e a c h s c r e e n .

Back Close

O n

Off




S e l e c t t o s h ow R e g i s t e r key O n / O f f.

A bl e t o u s e R e g i s t e r key t o r e g i s t e r / d e l e t e a t e a c h p a g e.

Back

On

Off


Close

NOTE



2 Select “Display register key” [“Display "Register" key”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Display register key” [“Display "Register" key”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Close

Copy default

Default menu

Modify Copy

Job Queue Report




Default setting

Setting mode

On / Off

On(All job)

On

Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Modify copy

Job Queue Report




Default setting

Setting mode

On / Off

On(All jobs)

On

Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-63


●

Customize screen layout (Main functions)

Perform the following procedure to change the order of the main functions and modes that are displayed in the “Basic” and the “User choice” tabs in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 If you want to change the order of the basic functions and modes, touch the “

▲

” or the “

▼

” cursor key to select the item you want to move. Then touch the “Move ahead” key or the

“Move behind” [“Move backward”] key to move that item and change the order of display. The final display of the basic functions and modes will be in accordance with the numbers in the list and those shown in the tabs to the left of that list.

Inch specifications


Basic

Back Close

User choice

Register mode

Reduce/Enlarge

Exposure Mode

Sort/Finish

1/2 sided

Orig. quality

Original size

Move

Ahead

Move

Behind




Basic

User choice

Register mode

Reduce/Enlarge

Exposure Mode

Sort/Finish

1/2 sided

Quality orig

Original size

Move ahead

Move backward

Back


Close

NOTE



2 Select “Customize(Main function)” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Customize(Main function)” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Close

Copy default

Default menu

Modify Copy

Job Queue Report




Default setting

Setting mode

On / Off

On(All job)

On

Change #

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Modify copy

Job Queue Report




Default setting

Setting mode

On / Off

On(All jobs)

On

Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-64

●

Customize screen layout (Add functions)

Perform the following procedure to add often-used functions and/or modes, or to change the order of their layout, in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier.



Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer


3 If you want to add functions and/or modes to the “User choice” tab, touch the “

▲

” or the “

▼

” cursor key under the list on the right to select the item you want to add. Then touch the “

▲

” or the “

▼

” cursor key under the list on the left to select in what order you want it to be added in that tab.

Finally, touch the “ b ” key to add the selected item to the

“User choice” tab.

Inch specifications


Basic

User choice

Register mode

Margin

Border Erase

Combine

None

None

None

Back Close

Addition mode

None

Select paper

Combine

Auto Selection

Batch scanning

Margin




Basic

User choice

Register mode

Erase

Cover

None

Test copy

None

Form overlay


Back Close

Addition Mode

None

Select paper

Merge

Auto selection

Batch scanning

Margin

NOTE



2 Select “Customize(Add function)” in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.

The “Customize(Add function)” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Modify Copy

Job Queue Report




Default setting

Setting mode

On / Off

On(All job)

On

Change #

Close

Up

Down


Default setting

Copy default

Default menu

Modify copy

Job Queue Report




Default setting

Setting mode

On / Off

On(All jobs)

On

Change #

Close

Up

Down




7-65


4. Multi-bypass tray paper settings

(1) Paper size and type

Perform the following procedure in order to use the multi-bypass tray to feed copy paper.


2 Touch the “Bypass setting” key.

The “Bypass setting” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

3 Specify the desired method of selecting the paper size.

If you select “Auto Detection” here, select the desired unit of measure (“Centimeter” or “Inch”) as well, and then go directly to step 5. If you want to select a custom paper size, touch the

“Input size” and then go to the next step.

Inch specifications

Default setting

A4

Bypass setting

Paper size

Auto

Detection

Input size

Others

Standard

Unit

Centimeter

Inch

Back

Paper type

Plain

Close

Select paper type


Default setting

Bypass setting

Paper size

Auto

Detection

Input size

Others

Standard

7-66

Unit

Centimeter

Inch

Back

Paper type

Plain

Close

Select paper type

4 Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change each of the displayed sizes (length and width) to the desired settings.

* In metric specification copiers, the desired sizes can also be entered directly by touching the corresponding “#keys” key and then using the keypad.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Back

Paper type

297x432mm

Close Bypass setting

Paper size

Y

Auto

Detection

Input size

Others

Standard

(3

7

/

8

~11

5

/

8

)

11 11 /

16

"

+

–

# keys

X

(5

7

/

8

~17)

16 9 /

16

"

+

–

# keys

Plain

Select paper type


Default setting

Bypass setting

Paper size

Auto

Detection

Input size

Others

Standard

Y

(98~297)

297 mm

+

–

#-Keys

X

(148~432)

420 mm

+

–

#-Keys

Back

Paper type

Plain

Close

Select paper type

5 Touch the “Select paper type” key.

The “Select paper type” screen will be displayed.

6 Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper to be used, and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Select paper type Back Close

Plain

Transparency

Rough

Vellum

Labels

Recycled

Preprinted

Bond

Cardstock

Color

Prepunched

Letterhead

Envelope

Envelope

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7

Custom 8


Default setting

Select paper type

Plain

Transparency

Rough

Vellum

Back

Labels

Recycled

Preprinted

Bond

Cardstock

Colour

Prepunched

Letterhead

Envelope

Envelope

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7

Custom 8

Close

7 Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

(2) Selecting other standard sizes

Perform the following procedure when you want to print out onto other standard sizes of special paper.


2 Touch the “Bypass setting” key.

The “Bypass setting” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

3 Touch the “Others Standard” key.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Bypass setting

Paper size

Auto

Detection

Input size

Others

Standard

Unit

Centimeter

Inch


Default setting

Bypass setting

Paper size

Auto

Detection

Input size

Others

Standard

Unit

Centimeter

Inch

End

Weekly timer

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

Back

Paper type

A4

Plain

Close

Select paper type

Back

Paper type

Plain

Close

Select paper type


4 Touch the “Select size” key. The “Select size” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Paper Size

ISO B5

Bypass setting

Paper size

Auto

Detection

Input size

Others

Standard

EX

Select size

Back

Paper type

Plain

Close

Select paper type


Default setting

Bypass setting

Paper size

Auto

Detection

Input size

Others

Standard

EX

Select size

Back

Paper type

Plain

Close

Select paper type

5 Touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper you want to use, and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Select size Back Close

EX

OUFUKU

HAGAKI

8 1 /

2 x13"

MO

Comm #10

Envelop

DL

Envelop

C5

YOUKEI 2

YOUKEI 4


Default setting

Select size

EX

OUFUKU

HAGAKI

8 1 /

2 x13"

MO

Comm #10

Envelop

DL

Envelop

C5

YOUKEI 2

YOUKEI 4

Paper size

YOUKEI 2

Back Close

7-67


6 Touch the “Select paper type” key. The “Select paper type” screen will be displayed. Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper you want to use, and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Select paper type Back Close

Plain

Transparency

Rough

Vellum

Labels

Recycled

Preprinted

Bond

Cardstock

Color

Prepunched

Letterhead

Envelope

Envelope

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7

Custom 8


Default setting

Select paper type

Plain

Transparency

Rough

Vellum

Back

Labels

Recycled

Preprinted

Bond

Cardstock

Colour

Prepunched

Letterhead

Envelope

Envelope

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7

Custom 8

Close

7 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

7-68


5. Box management default settings

Perform the following settings in order to manage the “boxes” that are used under the document management functions.

(1) Box settings

●

●

Setting

Document list print out

● Box name & password /

Clear data in box

●

Reset box

Document save time

Description

This procedure will allow you to print out a list of all of the images stored in the box for the form overlay mode, of the documents stored in the shared data box or of the documents stored in the synergy print boxes.

This procedure will delete all of the image data that is stored in the “Form” box, as well as the documents stored in the shared data box and the synergy print boxes. Make absolutely certain that you do not need the corresponding data before you attempt to delete it.

This procedure will allow you to change the name and password for any one of the synergy print boxes as well as delete at one time all of the data registered in any one box. If you register a password for any of these boxes, you will need to enter the registered password in order to print out or delete any documents that are stored win that box.

This procedure will allow you to select the length of time that will elapse before each job in a synergy print box is automatically deleted. Set this time to any number of days between 1 and 7.

* This setting cannot be made independently for each box.

Reference page

7-70

7-71

7-71

7-73

(2) Accessing the box management default settings

Perform the following procedure when you want to access the

“Document Management” screen for each of the various box management default settings.



The factory default setting for 63 cpm copiers is “6300” and for 75 cpm copiers is “7500”. If the entered code matched the registered one, the “Document Management” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Close Enter the administrator number



2 Touch the “Document Management” key.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Language

Bypass setting

Machine default

Document

Management

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

7-69


4 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired box management default setting.

Inch specifications

Document Management

Document Management

Shared Data Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Default setting

Synergy Print Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Box editing

Document save term

Form box

Print the list

Reset

Box


Document management

Document management

Shared Data Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Default setting

Synergy Print Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Box editing

Document saving

Form box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Close

Close

NOTES



• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(3) Making box management default settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).

2 A document list will be printed out for that box. once print out is completed, the touch panel will return to the screen in step

1.


“Default setting” screen. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

(3) Making box management default settings


● Document list print out

1 Touch the “Print the list” key under the box (“Form Box”,

“Shared Data Box” or “Synergy Print Box”) for which you want to print out the document list.

Inch specifications

Document Management

Document Management

Shared Data Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Synergy Print Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Box editing

Document save term

Default setting

Form box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Close


Document management

Document management

Shared Data Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Synergy Print Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Box editing

Document saving

Form box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Default setting

Close

7-70

●

Reset box

1 Touch the “Reset Box” key under the box (“Form Box”,

“Shared Data Box” or “Synergy Print Box”) that you want to delete all data for.

A verification screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Document Management

Document Management

Shared Data Box

Print the list

Synergy Print Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Reset

Box

Box editing

Document save term

Default setting

Form box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Close


Document management

Document management

Shared Data Box

Print the list

Synergy Print Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Reset

Box

Box editing

Document saving

Form box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Default setting

Close


Inch specifications

Stop


Shared Data Box

Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset?

Yes No

Stop

Shared Data Box

Reset this box. Do you really want to reset?

Yes No

3

If you selected “Yes”, all the data in the selected box will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step

1.If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 1 without deleting any data.

Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the

“Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.


●

Box name & password / Clear data in box

1 Touch the “Box editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The

“Box editing” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Document Management

Document Management

Shared Data Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Default setting

Synergy Print Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Box editing

Document save term

Form box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Close


Document management

Document management

Shared Data Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Default setting

Synergy Print Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Box editing

Document saving

Form box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Close

2 Either touch the synergy print box that contains the information to be modified, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key.

Inch specifications

Box editing

Select box No.

001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006

002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101

003 008 EFGH_0000102

004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103

005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104

011 QRST_0000105

012

016 MNOP_0200104

017 QRST_0200105

013 ABCD_0200101

014 EFGH_0200102

018 UVWX_0200106

019 ABCD_0500101

015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102

1/ 5

Default setting - Document management

Cancel

BOX No

(with #key)

Enter


Box editing

Select box No.


002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 017 QRST_0200105

003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106



1/5

Default setting - Document management

Job cancel

BOX No.

(With # key)

ENTER

7-71


3 If you want to change the name of that box, first select “Box name” and then touch the “Change #” key. Enter the new name as desired.

Inch specifications

Box007 Close

Default menu Setting mode

Box name ABCD_0000101 password (No register)

Reset

Box

Change #

Default setting - Document Management - Box editing


BOX 007

Default menu

Box name

Password

Setting mode

ABCD_0000101

(No register)

Close

Reset

Box

Change #

Default setting - Document management - Box editing

NOTE


4 If you want to change the name of that box, first select

“Password” and then touch the “Change #” key. The

“Password” screen will be displayed.

5 Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and then touch the “Close” key. The new password will be registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.

Inch specifications

Back Close password

Enter new password.

password (Enter by #key)

Clear

Default setting - Document Management - Box editings - 007


Password

Enter new password.

password (Enter #-key)

Clear

Back

Default settund - Document Management - Box editing - 007

Close

NOTES

• The password can be between 1 and 8 digits long.

• If you decide not to register a password for that box, touch the

“Clear” key and then, with nothing entered in the password field, touch the “Close” key.

6

7

If you want to delete all of the data in that box, select “Reset

Box”. A verification screen will be displayed.

Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications

Stop

Box No. :

007

Box name :

ABCD_0000101


Yes No


Stop

BOX No. :

007

Box name :

ABCD_0000101


Yes No

8

9

If you selected “Yes”, all the data in the selected box will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step

3.

If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3 without deleting any data.


Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1. Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the “Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key.

The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.

7-72

●

Document save time

1 Touch the “Document save term” [“Document saveing”] key under “Synergy Print Box”. The “Document data saving term”

[“Document data save period”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Document Management

Document Management

Shared Data Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Default setting

Synergy Print Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Box editing

Document save term

Form box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Close


Document management

Document management

Shared Data Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Default setting

Synergy Print Box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Box editing

Document saving

Form box

Print the list

Reset

Box

Close

2 Touch the “Set save term” [“Set save period”] key and then touch “+” key or the “-” key to change the displayed save time to the desired setting.

Inch specifications

Document data saving term

Set saving term for documents in Synergy Print Box.

(1~7)

Set save term

No time limit

+

–

6

Days

Default setting - Document Management

Back Close


Document data save period

Set save period for documents in Synergy Print Box.

(1~7)

Set save period

No time limit

+

–

6

Days

Default Setting - Document management

Back Close

NOTES

• The save time can be set to any number of days between 1 and 7.

The factory default setting is for “7 Days”.

• If you want the data to be saved indefinitely, touch the “No time limit” key to highlight it.

3

4


Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return to the “Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.


7-73


6. Hard disk management

Perform the following procedure to access the “Storage Management” screen and check available space on the hard disk and/or delete any invalid data.



The factory default setting for 63 cpm copiers is “6300” and for 75 cpm copiers is “7500”. If the entered code matched the registered one, the “HDD Management mode” [“HDD

Management”] screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications




2 Touch the “BOX Management”[“Hard Disk Management”] key.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

4 Touch the “On” key under “Check HDD capacity” (left side of the touch panel). The overall size of the hard disk, as well as the currently available space, will be displayed. If you want to delete any invalid data, go to the next step. If you are finished with this procedure, go directly to step 6.

Inch specifications

HDD management mode

HDD management mode

Check HDD capacity

Able to check the free space and capacity of HDD.

Delete invalid data

Delete invalid deta from the HDD.

Close

On

Default setting


HDD management mode

HDD management

Check HDD capacity

Able to check the free space and capacity of HDD.

Delete invalid data


On

On

On

Close

Default setting

7-74

5 Touch the “On” key under “Delete invalid data” (right side of the touch panel). The operation to delete invalid data will start.

Inch specifications

HDD management mode

HDD management mode

Item

Free Space

Capacity

Setting mode

18, 569 MB

19, 092 MB

Delete invalid data.


Close

On

Default setting


HDD management mode

HDD management

Item

Free space

Capacity

Setting mode

18, 569 MB

19, 092 MB

Delete invalid data.


Close

On

Default setting

6 Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.


7-75


7. Report print out

Perform the following procedure to print out one of the following reports.

< Copy report >

Lists all of the values for the copy default settings.

< Machine report >

Lists all of the values for the machine default settings.

< Counter report >

Lists the average toner density (black ratio) for each size of copy paper used under each of the copy and printer functions of this machine.

NOTE

Inch specification

• Make sure that 11" x 8

1/2

" size paper is loaded in one of the drawers[cassettes]. If 11" x 8

1/2

" size paper is NOT loaded in one of the drawers[cassettes], a screen requesting that you attempt to print again will be displayed during the procedure. In this case, select another paper size.


• Make sure A4 size paper is loaded in one of the drawers[cassettes].

If A4 size paper is NOT loaded in one of the drawers[cassettes], a screen requesting that you attempt to print again will be displayed during the procedure. In this case, select another paper size.




Inch specifications



Enter the administrator number

NOTE

It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.


Close

2 Touch the “Print report” key.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

4 Once the “Print report menu” screen is displayed, touch the

“Copy report” key, the “Machine report” key or the “Counter report” key, as appropriate.

Inch specifications

Print report

Print report menu

Copy report

Machine report

Counter report

Close

Default setting


Print report

Print report menu

Copy report

Machine report

Counter report

Default setting

Close

7-76

5 The “Printing report” screen will be displayed and printing of the corresponding report will start.

Inch specifications

Printing report.


Cancel

- - - - - -

1 sided

Rear

AMS

11x8

1 /

2

"

1-sided

Output tray

Cancel


Printing report.

O r i g i n a l

- - - - - -

1-sided top/rear

AMS

C o u n t / s e t

1-sided

Sort

Plain

O u t p u t

Output tray

Cancel

NOTE

If you want to cancel print out of the corresponding report, touch the

“Cancel” key.




7-77


8. Changing the language used for messages

You can select the language that will be used on the touch panel.

The available languages are as follows:

Inch specification copiers:

English, French (“Français”), Spanish (“Español”) and Japanese

(“ ”)

Metric specification copiers:

English, German (“DEUTSCH”), French (“FRANÇAIS”), Italian

(“ITALIANO”) and Spanish (“ESPAÑOL”)


3 Touch the key that corresponds to the language that you want to use.

The language used on the touch panel will change to that selected.

Inch specifications

Language Stop

Default setting


Language Stop

Español

Default setting

2 Touch the “Language” key. The “Language” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

BOX

Management

Print report

End

Weekly timer


Default setting

Default setting

Copy default

Machine default

Document

Management

Language

Bypass setting

Management

Hard Disk

Management

Print report

End

Week timer

7-78


9. Entering characters

Follow the procedure below when you want to register names for programs, boxes and other stored documents.

●

Character input screen

Inch specifications 1 2 3 4 5

abcde

8

8


abcde

1 2

7

3

6

4 5

Illustration No

1

2

Name of part

Entry field

“ r ” and “ R ” keys

3

4

5

6

7

8

“Back” key

“Stop” key

“Del.” key

“End” key

“Space” key

Keyboard

7 6

Function

Displays entered information.

Moves the cursor to the left and right, respectively.

Deletes one character to the left of the cursor each time the key is pressed.

Cancels character input and returns to the previous screen.

Deletes all of the character to the right of the cursor.

Registers the information entered and moves the touch panel back to the most recent screen in the corresponding procedure.

Enters a space when pressed.

Used to enter characters. Touch the “Shift” key to switch between upper- and lowercase input.

* Use the keypad on the copier to enter numerals.

7-79


●

Example character input

1 Touch the “a”, “b”, “c”, “d” and “e” keys in that order on the keyboard.

“abcde” will be displayed in the entry field.

Inch specifications abcde

Metric specifications abcde

2 Touch the “End” key.

A verification screen will be displayed.

3 Touch the “Yes” key to register the information and the touch panel will move back to the most recent screen in the corresponding procedure.

7-80

Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

(1) Side Feeder

This unit is an auxiliary paper feed unit that holds up to 4,000 sheets of standard 11" x 8

1/2

" , A4 or B5 size copy paper.

* The following illustration show when the Document Finisher is installed together with the optional Center-Folding Unit and Multi Job

Tray.

(2) Document Finisher

The Document Finisher stores a large quantity of copies and can sort multiple copy sets (Sort/Finished mode), or it can groups copies made from multiple originals, with all the copies produced from an individual original stacked together in one set (Group mode), by shifting their position of ejection. It can also staple the finished copy sets as well as punch holes in them for filing purposes (optional).

If the optional Center-Folding Unit and Multi Job Tray are installed in your copier as well, you will also be able to use the Center-Folding

Unit to center bind and center fold the copy sets and designate them for ejection into the Multi Job Tray. For more details, refer to the

Operation Guide for the Document Finisher.

IMPORTANT!

Cautions during copying:

• If copies come out curled or are stacked unevenly, turn the paper in the drawer[cassette] over.

• When copying onto special paper such as OHP film, etc., be sure to specify the type of paper that is set on the multi-bypass tray.

1 Copying in the Sort mode

1 Touch the “Function” tab and then touch the “Sort/Finished” key. The “Sort/Finished” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Up

Down


Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

Ready to copy.

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

8-1


2 Touch the “Sort:ON” key.

(Only for metric specification copiers produced)

The “Output each page” key will change to the “1 set” key.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Sort/Finished

S o r t

Sort:OFF

Sort:ON

Off

On

O f f s e t S t a p l e

Staple mode

Register

P u n c h

Punch mode

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Sort/Finished

S o r t

Sort:Off

Sort:On

G r o u p

None

Output each page

S t a p l e

Staple

Mode

Register

P u n c h

Punch

Mode

Paper size Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

3 Touch the “On” [“1 set”] key.




Scanning of the originals will start and the number of originals that was set will be displayed.

7 Copying will start and each of the finished copy sets will be stacked separately by shifting their position of ejection.

8 Once copying is completed, removed the finished copy sets from the Finisher.

2 Copying in the Group mode


Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size Set

Up

Down

2 Touch the “Sort:OFF” key.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Sort/Finished

S o r t

Sort:OFF

Sort:ON

Off

On

O f f s e t S t a p l e

Staple mode

Register

P u n c h

Punch mode

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Sort/Finished

S o r t

Sort:Off

Sort:On

G r o u p

None

Output each page

S t a p l e

Staple

Mode

Register

P u n c h

Punch

Mode

Paper size Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

3 Touch the “On” [“Output each page”] key.





7 Copying will start and each set of copies made from each original will be stacked separately by shifting their position of ejection.


8-2

3 Copying in the Sort-Staple mode


Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

2 Touch the “Staple mode” key.

The “Staple mode” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Sort/Finished

S o r t O f f s e t S t a p l e

Register

P u n c h

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Sort:OFF

Sort:ON

Off

On

Staple mode

Punch mode

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Sort/Finished

S o r t G r o u p S t a p l e

Sort:Off

Sort:On

None

Output each page

Staple

Mode

Register

P u n c h

Punch

Mode

Paper size Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

Orientation of originals

No and position of staples

1 staple

Top left stapling

1 staple

Top right stapling

2 staples

Left side stapling

2 staples

Right side stapling

2 staples

Top stapling

Stapling

Not possible


3 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired number of staples.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Staple mode

Staple

Back

Check direction


Close

None

1 staple

2 staples

Limited number of staple pages.

The limit is set in setting mode.

When selecting staple function the offset can not be combined.

Rear

Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Staple Mode

Staple

Paper size Set

Back

Check direction


Close

None

1 staple

2 staples

Limited number of pages to be stapled.

The limitation depends on setting mode.

Cannot combine sort function and staple.

Back Edge

Left top corner

* The stapling position will be displayed on the image of the finished copies that appears in the touch panel, as shown in the illustration below. Verify the number and position of the staples before copying. When the combination of the selected functions does not allow stapling, the staple marks will appear on the displayed image.

8-3


4

5


Verify the direction in which the originals were set.

Press the [Start] key.


NOTE

If you do not set the originals in the Document Processor, perform the appropriate procedure to set all of the originals to be copied.

Once all of the originals have been completely scanned, touch the

“Scanning finished” key.

6 Copying will start and each finished copy set will be automatically stapled and ejected onto the Finisher.


2 Touch the “Punch mode” key.

The “Punch” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Sort/Finished

S o r t O f f s e t S t a p l e

Register

P u n c h

Staple mode

Punch mode

Sort:OFF

Sort:ON

Off

On

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Left top corner

Rear


Ready to copy.

Sort/Finished

S o r t G r o u p S t a p l e

Sort:Off

Sort:On

None

Output each page

Staple

Mode

Register

P u n c h

Punch

Mode

Paper size

Set

Back

Check direction


Close

Back Edge

Left top corner

IMPORTANT!

If the optional Hole Punch Unit is not installed in your copier, the

“Punch mode” key will not be displayed.

4 Copying in the Hole Punch mode


Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Select paper

Exposure mode

Orig.image

quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2 sided/

Separation

Reduce

/Enlarge

Margin/

Centering

Border

Erase

User choice

Select orig. size

Auto

Selection

Page #

Cover

Mode

Function

Combine

Batch scanning

Forms

Overlay

Booklet

Program

Up

Down


Ready to copy.

Select paper

Exposure mode

Image quality

Sort/

Finished

Basic

2-sided/

Split

Reduce/

Enlarge

Margin/

Imag. shift

Erase

Mode

User choice

Select size orig.

Auto selection

Page numbering

Cover

Mode

Function

Merge copy


Form overlay

Booklet

Program

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

3 Touch the “2 holes” key or the “3 holes” key, as appropriate

(select between the “2 holes” key or the “4 holes” key in metric specification copiers). The screen to select the hole positioning will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Reset originals in processor.

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Punch mode

Punch

Back Close

Check direction


None

2 holes

3 holes Rear Left top corner


Ready to copy.

Punch Mode

Punch

None

2 holes

4 holes

Paper size

Set

Back Close

Check direction


Back Edge Left top corner

8-4

Inch specifications


No and position of holes

2 holes

Left side

2 holes

Right side

2 holes

Top

3 holes

Left side

3 holes

Right side

3 holes

Top

Punching

Not possible


* The hole punching position will be displayed on the image of the finished copies that appears in the touch panel, as shown in the illustration below.

Verify the number and position of the holes before copying. When the combination of the selected functions does not allow hole punching, the hole marks will not appear on the displayed image.



No and position of holes

2 holes

Left side

2 holes

Right side

2 holes

Top

4 holes

Left side

4 holes

Right side

4 holes

Top

Punching

Not possible

IMPORTANT!

The position of the holes on each page may differ very slightly. This may be especially true if the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function engages and changes to paper feed from a different drawer[cassette].


Verify the direction in which the originals were set.



6 Copying will start and each finished copy will be automatically hole punched and ejected onto the Finisher.

7 Once copying is completed, removed the finished copies from the Finisher.

8-5


5 Selecting the location of copy ejection

1 Touch the “Function” tab and then touch the “Select of

Output” key. The “Select of Output” screen will be displayed.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco Print

Modify

Copy

OHP backing

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Proof Copy

Invert

Memo pages

Mirror



Ready to copy.

Auto

Rotation

Eco print

Modify copy

OHP back

Orig. set direction

Select of

Output

Test copy

Invert

Program

Memo pages

Mirror

Paper size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Up

Down

Paper size

Set

Up

Down

User choice Function Basic Program

2 Select the desired location for the ejection of finished copies.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

Select of Output Register

Paper size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Back Close

Au t o

Tray A

Tray 1

Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

S e l e c t p r o p e r o u t p u t t ray t o avo i d m i x i n g j o b.

Yo u c a n c o n f i r m o u t p u t t ray w i t h o u t p u t m a n a g e m e n t .


Ready to copy.

Select of Output

Au t o

Tray A

Tray 1

Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Register

Paper size Set

Back Close

S e l e c t p r o p e r o u t p u t t ray t o avo i d j o b m i x i n g .

Yo u c a n c o n f i r m o u t p u t t ray w i t h o u t p u t m a n a g e m e n t .

5

6

7

Press the [Start] key.


Copying will start and the finished copies will be ejected in the selected tray.

Once copying is completed, removed the finished copy sets from the corresponding tray(s).

6 Stacking mode

If the number of copies that is ejected onto Tray B during large volume copying in the Non-sort mode reaches the acceptable limit

(max: 200), all copies from the 201st onward will be ejected onto

Tray A.

NOTES

• If you select “Auto”, the copies will be ejected into the next empty tray.

• The location of ejection can be checked in the “Job history” screen

(See page 6-22.).



8-6

(3) Key Counter

The Key Counter is used for checking copier use and is convenient for centralized management of the number of copies made by each department as well as the total number of copies made overall on the machine.


(4) Printer Kit

If the Printer Kit is installed in your copier, you can use the copier as a printer. For more details, refer to the Operation Guide for the Printer

Kit.

Since a networking board is installed as standard equipment in the copier, access from multiple computers is possible and the machine can be used as a network printer.

● Installing the Key Counter

Insert the Key Counter securely into the key counter opening.

(5) Network Scanner Kit

If the Network Scanner Kit is installed in your copier, you can use the copier as a scanner from multiple computers over your network.

NOTE

When you are using the key counter function, copies cannot be made unless the Key Counter is inserted into the copier. If the Key Counter is not securely inserted into its opening, “Insert key counter.” will be displayed on the touch panel.

8-7


(6) Tandem Copier Kit

The Tandem Copier Kit is required when two copy machines are connected together. By connecting two copy machines together, you can make a large volume of copies using both machines at the same time (tandem copying) or, if you also use the optional printer functions of this copier, you can print to both machines at the same time

(tandem printing), thereby reducing the job time by half.

• The following modes and operations are not available under tandem copying.

1 Proof mode

2 Transparency+backing sheet mode

3 Form overlay mode

4 Auto selection/Filing mode (filing)

5 Feeding non-standard-size paper from the multi-bypass tray

6 Manual feeding of envelopes from the multi-bypass tray

7 Batch scanning mode

8 Job build mode

9 Document management functions (printing out documents)

10 Selecting tandem operation with job reservation

11 Initiating tandem copying with the [Interrupt] key

* The modes and operations listed as 1 through 7 above can be selected during tandem copying, but the tandem copying mode will be canceled.

* The modes and operations listed as 8 through 11 above will not be available while the tandem copy mode is engaged.

1 Features of the Tandem Copier Kit

• Jobs scanned at the copier or sent from a computer are divided equally between the two machines.

• If, for any reason, whether it be mechanical trouble or when tandem copying is terminated in one copier due to another job, any remaining copying or printing that is required will be accomplished automatically by whichever machine completes its current job first

(output recovery function). This will help you to increase your overall copying and printing efficiency.

• It is possible to perform interrupt copying on the sub [slave] machine, even during tandem copying, enabling you to make copies in a hurry without having to have that job wait in a queue.

2 Operating requirements of the Tandem Copier Kit

• Copying is only possible in the sort mode.

• All jobs (number of copies/prints) will be divided equally between the two machines.

• It is not possible to have copying start while the remaining originals are still being scanned. Copying will only begin after all originals are scanned.

• Interrupt copying is not possible during scanning for tandem copying or tandem printing, or during transmission of print data from a computer. (The operation panel is not available for use during this time as well.)

• From the moment copying is initiated after scanning, interrupt copying is only possible at the sub [slave] machine. (Interrupt copying is not possible at the main [master] machine until after copying is complete.)

• Tandem copying is not available if the internal memory or Hard Disk are not usable for any reason.

8-8

3 Performing tandem copying

1 Turn the main switch ON to the 2 copiers that are connected via the interface cable.

2 Make sure that both copiers have completed their warm-up operation.

3 Touch the “Tandem Copy” key on one of the copiers. That copier will become the main [master] machine for tandem copying.

Inch specifications

Ready to copy.

11x8

1

/

2

"

Plain

11x8

Plain

1 /

2

"

/ /

2

" "

11x8

Plain

/ /

2

" "

Basic

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function


Ready to copy.

Auto

Exposure

Exposure

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort

/Finished

Paper Size

11x8 1 /

2

"

Set

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduc

/Enlarge

Tandem

Copy

Plain

Basic

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Paper Size Set

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

Tandem

Copy


<Sub [Slave]>

Inch specifications

4


Make the desired copy mode settings, etc., in the [master] copier.

NOTES

• Tandem copying is not available in the following cases:

. while the sub [slave] copier is in the middle of copying.

. while the main switch of the sub [slave] copier is turned OFF.

. while operation in the sub [slave] copier is stopped because

“Paper misfeed.”, “Call for service.”, or “Add toner to resume copying” are displayed.

NOTE

The touch panel display will change as follows once the “Tandem

Copy” key is touched.

<Main [Master]>

Inch specifications

Ready to Tandem Copy. [Main]

11x8 1 /

2

"

Plain

8

1

/

2 x11" "

/

2

" "

11x8

Plain

/

2

" "

Basic

AMS

User choice

Reduce

/Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort

/Finished

Paper Size

11x8

1

/

2

"

Set

Combine

Orig.image

quality

Reduc

/Enlarge

Tandem

Copy


Ready to tandem copy. [Master]

Paper Size Set

Plain

Basic

AMS

User choice

Reduce/

Enlarge

Function

Auto

Exposure

Exposure

Program

Sort:Off

Sort:On

Sort/

Finished

Merge copy

Image quality

Reduce/

Enlarge

Tandem

Copy

5 Use the [master] copier to set the number of copies to be made.

NOTES

• Tandem copying should only be used when making at least 3 or more copy sets.

• If the total number of copy sets to be made is an even number, the job will be divided equally between the two copiers. If it is an odd number, the [master] copier will make one more copier than the sub

[slave] copier.

6

7

Set the originals in the [master] copier.

Press the [Start] key on the [master] copier.

8-9


8-10

Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING

1. If one of the following messages is displayed

When any of the following messages appears on the message display, take the indicated action.

Message Procedure

“Close xxx cover.”

“Check the cover.” [“Check cover.”]

“Close Document processor.”

The indicated cover is open. Close all covers securely.

Check for an open cover and close it securely.

Close the Document Processor.

“Set drawer xx.”

[“Close paper cassette xx.”]

One of the drawers[cassettes] is not closed properly. First pull it out, and then push it all the way back in.

“Attach Side Paper Deck to Mainframe.”

[“Attach side feeder to main frame.”]

Attach the optional Side Feeder securely to the copier.

“Attach Finisher.” Connect the optional Document Finisher securely to the copier.

“Add paper in drawer.”

[“Add paper cassette.”]

There is no more paper in the displayed drawer[cassette]. Load paper. If there is another drawer[cassette] that contains the same size of paper in the same orientation, touch the desired paper size key on the left side of the touch panel to switch paper feed and resume copying.

Reference page

——

——

——

——

——

——

3-1

“Low on paper.” Paper is running low in drawer[cassette] No.1 or in the optional Side Feeder.

“Paper capacity exceeded.

Remove paper from Side Paper Deck.”

[“Paper capacity exceeded.

Remove paper from side feeder.”]

The number of sheets of paper loaded in the optional Side Feeder has exceeded the acceptable limit. Load paper only up to the acceptable limit.

“Add paper in bypass. xx size”

[“Place paper on bypass size. xx size”]

There is no paper of the selected size on the multi-bypass tray. Set paper onto the multi-bypass tray.

“Add paper in bypass.”

[“Add paper on stack bypass.”]

There is no more paper on the multi-bypass tray. Set paper onto the multi-bypass tray.

3-2

3-6

3-6

3-4

3-4

9-1



Load transparencies onto the multi-bypass tray.

“Place transparency in bypass.”

[“Place transparencies on stack bypass.”]

Reference page

3-4

“Check paper size.” There is no paper loaded of a size that can be used in the currently selected mode.

Check the paper.

“Reposition original.” The orientation of the original and the selected paper are different. Change the orientation of the original. If you press the [Start] key without changing the original, copying will be performed at a 100% (1:1) magnification ratio.

“Check paper size. Copy paper is not the same size as original.”

[“Paper size in cassette differs from actual size. Check paper size in cassette.”]

Load paper of the size selected or change the selection for the paper size.

——

——

7-23

“Reposition original or change drawer.”

[“Reset original or select another paper cassette.”]

The orientation of the original and the selected paper are different. Change the orientation of the original.

“Reset originals in processor.” Remove the originals from the Document Processor, stack them together cleanly and reset them in their current order back in the Document Processor.

——

——

“Reset all originals in processor.”

[“Reset originals in processor.”]

“Reset all originals in Document processor.”

[“Reset originals in Document processor.”]

“Cannot copy this paper type.”

Remove the originals from the Document Processor and reset them in their original order back in the Document Processor.

Remove the originals from the Document Processor.

The selected paper type cannot be copied. Select a different type of paper.

——

——

——

“Cannot staple this paper type.”

“Cannot punch this paper type.”

The selected paper type cannot be stapled. Select a different type of paper.

The selected paper size cannot be hole punched. Select a different type of paper.

——

——

—— “Interrupt copying is not available for this size.”

Interrupt copying is not possible. Use different originals or cancel the interrupt copying operation and try to copy again later.

The selected paper size cannot be sorted. Select a different size of paper.

“Cannot offset this paper size.”

[“Cannot group this paper size.”]

“Cannot staple this size.”

[“Cannot staple this paper size.”]

“Cannot punch this size.”

[“Cannot punch this paper size.”]

The selected paper size cannot be stapled. For more detailed information, refer to the Operation Guide for your Document Finisher.

The selected paper size cannot be hole punched. For more detailed information, refer to the Operation Guide for your Document Finisher.

——

——

——

9-2



“Cannot staple. ___: maximum capacity

(Staple)”

[“Cannot staple. ___: Max. staples”]

The number of copies stapled in the optional Document Finisher has exceeded the acceptable limit. For more detailed information, refer to the Operation Guide for your

Document Finisher.

Reference page

——

—— “The output tray exceeds capacity.

Remove paper, and press “Start” key.”

[“Too much paper in output tray. Remove paper, and press “Start” key.”]

The number of copies in the copy eject tray has exceeded the acceptable limit.

Remove the copies from the copy eject tray and then press the [Start] key.

“The output tray exceeds capacity.

Remove paper, and press “Continue” key.”

[“Too much paper in output tray. Remove paper, and press “Continue” key.”]

When using the copier as a printer, the number of print outs in the copy eject tray has exceeded the acceptable limit. Remove the print outs from the copy eject tray and then touch the “Continue” key.

“Finisher paper capacity exceeded.

(Tray x) Remove paper, and press

“Start” key.”

The number of copies in the designated tray of the optional Document Finisher has exceeded the acceptable limit. Remove the copies from that tray and then press the

[Start] key.

“Finisher paper capacity exceeded.

(Tray x) Remove paper, and press

“Continue” key.”

When using the copier as a printer, the number of print outs in the designated tray of the optional Document Finisher has exceeded the acceptable limit. Remove the print outs from that tray and then touch the “Continue” key.

“These functions cannot be combined.” The function or mode that you just selected cannot be used in combination with the currently set function or mode.

“Tandem Copy is cancelled. Unable to

Tandem Copy under current setting.”

[“Cancel tandem copy. Cannot tandem copy with the present setting.”]

Tandem copying (option) is not possible. Touch the “Check” key and check the copy settings.

“Exceeds pre registered copying quantity.”

[“Copy limit for this ID-code has been reached. No copying possible.”]

The number of copies made under your department ID-code has reached the limit that was set under the copy management mode and copying is no longer possible with that code. Use the copy management mode to clear the copy count.

“Insert key counter.” Insert the Key Counter securely into its opening.

“Memory full.” The copier’s memory is full. Select whether you want to print out that data that is already scanned or delete all of that data. It will not be possible to copy or scan another original until one of these two operations is performed.

“Memory full. Delete the registered data in the box.”

[“Memory full. Delete the registered data from box.”]

The memory for the document management function boxes is full. In order to register new documents in any of the boxes, delete any unnecessary data.

“Ready to copy.

Add toner.”

There is insufficient toner left in the copier. Since only one copy can be made at a time in this state, add toner as soon as possible.

——

——

——

——

——

7-8

8-7

——

6-1

3-9

9-3


Message

“Add toner to resume copying.”

Procedure

There is insufficient toner left in the copier to make copies. Add toner immediately.

Reference page

3-9

“Image cycle.” [“Now adding toner.”] Toner is now being added. Please wait until the operation is complete.

“Now restoring stored data in HDD.”

[“Please wait. Now maintaining stored data.”]

The Hard Disk is now being checked. Please wait until the operation is complete.

“Replace the waste toner box.”

“Check the waste punch box.”

[“Check Punch Hole box.”]

“Out of staples. Add staples.”

[“Stapler empty. Add staples.”]

“Time for maintenance.”

“Time for replacing Felt Roller.”

[“Felt cleaning maintenance.”]

“Paper misfeed. Remove paper.”

The waste toner box is full. Replace that box.

The hole punch chad box in the optional Document Finisher is full. Refer to the

Operation Guide for your Document Finisher and dispose of the hole punch chad.

There are no staples left in the optional Document Finisher. Refer to the Operation

Guide for your Document Finisher and load staples.

Periodic maintenance is required to keep your copier in good condition. Contact your service representative or authorized service center as soon as possible.

It is time to replace certain parts in your copier. Contact your service representative or authorized service center.

If paper misfeeds, the location of the misfeed will be indicated on the touch panel.

Leave the main switch ON ( | ) and follow the appropriate procedure to remove the jammed paper.

——

——

3-11

——

——

——

——

9-7

“Open drawer xx, check and remove paper from inside of the machine.”

[“Open cassette xx, check and remove paper from inside of machine.”]

Check to see if paper has misfed inside one of the drawer[cassette]. if it has, remove the jammed paper.

“Remove paper from inner tray of

Finisher.”

“Staple jam. Remove staples.”

[“Staple jam. Remove staple(s).”]

“Call service.”

There are still copies left in the optional Document Finisher. Remove all of the copies from the Document Finisher.

Staples have jammed in the optional Document Finisher. Refer to the Operation

Guide for your Document Finisher and remove the jammed staples.

9-7

——

——

Open and then close the front cover. If this message still remains, make a note of the number that displayed with the “C”, turn the main switch OFF (O), remove the power plug from the outlet and contact your service representative or authorized service center.

——

9-4

Message

“Paper drawer is out of order.

Select another paper drawer.”

[“Paper cassette is out of order.

Select other paper cassette.”]

“Side Paper Deck is out of order.

select another paper drawer.”

[“Side feeder is out of order.

Select another paper cassette.”]

“Bypass cannot be used.

Select another paper drawer.”

[“Bypass cannot be used.

Select a paper cassette.”]

“Finisher is out of order. Detach

Finisher.”

Procedure


Reference page

—— The drawer[cassette] currently in use is out of order and cannot be used for the moment. Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as possible. If you want to continue copying, use another drawer[cassette].

The optional Side Feeder is out of order and cannot be used for the moment.

Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as possible. If you want to continue copying, use another drawer[cassette].

The multi-bypass tray is out of order and cannot be used for the moment. Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as possible.

If you want to continue copying, use another drawer[cassette].

“System error. Main switch off / on.”

“HDD error. Cannot activate management mode.”

“Check KMAS.”

The optional Document Finisher is out of order and cannot be used for the moment.

Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as possible.

An error has occurred. Turn the main switch OFF (O) and then back ON ( | ) again.

A Hard Disk error has occurred. Contact your service representative or authorized service center as soon as possible.

An error has occurred. Contact your service representative or authorized service center.

——

——

——

——

——

——

9-5


2. If one of these indicators lights or flashes

If one of the indicators to the left of the [Copier] key, the [Printer] key, or the [Scanner] key either lights orange or flashes orange, carry out the appropriate procedure indicated below.

Indication Procedure

Lights orange or flashes orange

Check the appropriate response to the message, and perform the corresponding procedure.

Reference page

–

9-6


3. If paper jams

If a paper misfeed occurs, copying will stop and a message will appear on the touch panel about the misfeed. Leave the main switch ON ( | ) and refer to “(3) Removal procedures” to remove the jammed paper.

Inch specification Metric specification

Paper misfeed.

Paper misfeed.

1.Open front cover.

1.Open front cover.

JAM 00 JAM 00

(1) Cautions

WARNING

High voltage is present in the charger section. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of electrical shock.

CAUTION

The copier’s fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting burned.

(2) Misfeed location indicators

Paper misfeed.

JAM 00

1.Open front cover.

6

3 5

2

1

* Do not reuse misfed paper.

* If paper is torn during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the copier, or they could cause another misfeed later.

* Once misfed paper has been removed, warm-up will begin, the misfeed indication will go out, and the copier will return to the same settings prior to the misfeed.

* If a misfeed occurs in the Document Finisher, it is not necessary to add the misfed copy to the other copies that are already ejected into the tray, as that copy will be automatically made again.

4 1

1 Misfeed in a paper feed area (page 9-8)

2 Misfeed in the paper conveyor section (page 9-13)

3 Misfeed in the fixing section or the ejection section (page 9-14)

4 Misfeed in the Duplex Unit (page 9-17)

5 Misfeed in the Document Processor (page 9-19)

6 Misfeed in the optional Document Finisher (page 9-20)

9-7


(3) Removal procedures

1 Misfeed in a paper feed area

• Misfeed in drawer[cassette] No.1

If the message below is displayed, a misfeed has occurred in drawer[cassette] No.1. Perform the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.

Inch specification

Paper misfeed.

1.Open right cover, and remove paper.

2.Open paper drawer 1.

3.Remove paper.

4.Set the drawer, and close the cover.

JAM 00


Paper misfeed.


2.Open paper cassette 1.

3.Remove paper.

4.Set the cassette, and close the cover.

JAM 00

3 Pull out drawer[cassette] No.1.

4 Remove any jammed paper without tearing it.

* If the paper does happen to tear, remove any loose scraps from inside the copier.

1 If the optional Side Feeder is installed in the copier, disconnect it from the main body of the copier.

5

6

Close the upper right cover to the copier and push drawer[cassette] No.1 back in firmly.

If necessary, reconnect the Side Feeder to the copier.

2 First, open the upper right cover to the copier and check if there is any jammed paper. If there is any jammed paper inside that cover, remove it.

9-8

• Misfeed in drawer[cassette] No.2 or drawer[cassette] No.3

If the message below is displayed, a misfeed has occurred in either drawer[cassette] No.2 or drawer[cassette] No.3. Perform the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.

Inch specification

Paper misfeed.


2.Open paper drawer 3.

3.Remove paper.

4.Set the drawer, and close the cover.

JAM 00


Paper misfeed.

JAM 00


2.Open paper cassette 3.

3.Remove paper.

4.Set the cassette, and close the cover.


3 Pull out the drawer[cassette] currently being used.




5

6

Close the lower right cover to the copier and push the open drawer[cassette] back in firmly.

If necessary, reconnect the Side Feeder to the copier.

2 First, open the lower right cover to the copier and check if there is any jammed paper. If there is any jammed paper inside that cover, remove it.

9-9


• Misfeed inside the upper right cover of the copier

If the message below is displayed, a misfeed has occurred inside the upper right cover of the copier. Perform the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.

Inch specification

Paper misfeed.

1.Open right cover.

2.Remove paper.

3.Close cover.

JAM 00


Paper misfeed.

JAM 00

1.Open right cover.

2.Remove paper.

3.Close cover.




4 Close the upper right cover to the copier.

5 If necessary, reconnect the Side Feeder to the copier.

• Misfeed inside the lower right cover of the copier

If the message below is displayed, a misfeed has occurred inside the lower right cover of the copier. Perform the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.

Inch specification

Paper misfeed.

1.Open right cover.

2.Remove paper.

3.Close cover.

JAM 00

2 Open the upper right cover to the copier.


Paper misfeed.

JAM 00

1.Open right cover.

2.Remove paper.

3.Close cover.


9-10

2 Open the lower right cover to the copier.




• Misfeed in the multi-bypass tray

If the message below is displayed, a misfeed has occurred in multibypass tray. Perform the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.

Inch specification

Paper misfeed.

1.Remove paper from Multi purpose tray.

JAM 00


Paper misfeed.

JAM 00

1.Remove paper from multi purpose tray.

1 Remove all of the paper remaining in the multi-bypass tray.

* If the paper is difficult to remove, do not attempt to force it.

Instead, refer to “ 2 Misfeed in the paper conveyor section” on page 9-13 in order to remove the jammed paper.

4 Close the lower right cover to the copier.


2 Reset the paper in the multi-bypass tray.

9-11


• Misfeed in the optional Side Feeder

If the message below is displayed, a misfeed has occurred in the optional Side Feeder. Perform the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.

Inch specification

Paper misfeed.

1.Remove paper from between Copier and

Side Paper Deck.

2.Reset Side Paper Deck to Mainframe.

JAM 00


Paper misfeed.

JAM 00

1.Remove paper from between copier and

side feeder.

2.Reset side feeder to mainframe.

3 Reconnect the Side Feeder to the copier.

If there is any jammed paper inside the Side Feeder, go to the next step.

4 Open the upper cover to the Side Feeder.

1 Disconnect the Side Feeder from the main body of the copier.

5 Remove the jammed paper.

2 If there is any jammed paper inside the coupling area between the Side Feeder and the copier, remove it.

6 Close the upper cover to the Side Feeder.

9-12

2 Misfeed in the paper conveyor section

If a misfeed occurs in the paper conveyor section, perform the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.

* When a misfeed has occurred in the paper conveyor section, the following message will appear after you open the front cover in step 1.

Inch specification

Paper misfeed.

1.Turn green lever counterclockwise.

2.Turn right green knob clockwise.

3.Pull out transfer unit.

JAM 00


Paper misfeed.

JAM 00

1.Turn green lever to the left.

2.Turn right green knob clockwise.

3.Pull out transfer unit.


3 Turn the green conveyor knob in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration. The paper will be transported to the paper conveyor unit.

4 Pull the paper conveyor unit out slowly.

1 Open the front cover.

2 Push the green release lever down to the left.

WARNING


5 Remove the jammed paper without tearing it.


9-13


6

7

Replace the paper conveyor unit in its original position in the copier.

Push the green release lever back up to its original position.

3 Misfeed in the fixing section or the ejection section

If the message below is displayed, a misfeed has occurred in the fixing section or the ejection section. Perform the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.

Inch specification

Paper misfeed.

1.Open left cover.

2.Remove paper.

(If it is difficult to remove paper,

open front cover and turn green knob

counterclockwise.)

3.Close cover.

JAM 00

8 Close the front cover.


Paper misfeed.

JAM 00

1.Open left cover.

2.Remove paper.

(If it is difficult to remove paper,

open front cover and turn left green knob

counterclockwise.)

3.Close cover.

1 Remove the copy eject tray.

If the optional Document Finisher is installed on your copier, open the front cover to the Document Finisher, pull the release lever towards you and detach the Document Finisher from the copier.

3

1

2

2 Open the left cover to the copier and remove any jammed paper.

* If the paper is difficult to remove, do not attempt to force it.

Instead, proceed to the next step.

9-14

3 Open the front cover to the copier.


7 Pull the paper conveyor unit out slowly. Remove any jammed paper.

4 Turn the green fixing knob in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration. Remove the jammed paper once it is ejected.

WARNING


8 Open the cover to the fixing unit.

5 Push the green release lever down to the left.

6 Turn the green conveyor knob in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration. The paper will be transported to the paper conveyor unit.

CAUTION

The copier’s fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting burned.

9-15




13 Close the left and front covers to the copier.

14 Reattach the copy eject tray.

If necessary, reattach the Document Finisher to the copier.


1

3

2

10 Close the cover to the fixing unit.

11 Replace the paper conveyor unit in its original position in the copier.

12 Push the green release lever back up to its original position.

9-16

4 Misfeed in the Duplex Unit

If a misfeed occurs in the Duplex Unit, perform the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.

* When a misfeed has occurred in the Duplex Unit, the following message will appear after you pull out the Duplex Unit in step 6.

Inch specification

Paper misfeed.

JAM 00

1.Remove paper from duplex unit.

2.Open upper cover and remove paper.

3.Loosen 2-green screws are on rear side of

the duplex unit and open the guide plate.

4.Remove paper.

5.Close cover and reset duplex unit.


Paper misfeed.

JAM 00

1.Remove paper from duplex unit.

2.Open upper cover and remove paper.

3.Remove 2 green screws on rear side of

the duplex unit and open the guide plate.

4.Remove paper.

5.Close cover and reset duplex unit.

4

5


Open the upper right cover to the copier and check if there is any jammed paper. If there is any jammed paper inside that cover, remove it.

Open the front cover to the copier.

1 Remove the copy eject tray.

If the optional Document Finisher is installed on your copier, open the front cover to the Document Finisher, pull the release lever towards you and detach the Document Finisher from the copier.

3

6 Pull the Duplex Unit out towards you as far as it will go.

1

2

2 Open the left cover to the copier and remove any jammed paper.

7 Remove any jammed paper.


9-17


8 Open the upper cover to the Duplex Unit and remove any jammed paper without tearing it.

Close the upper cover and then proceed to the next step.

12 Replace the Duplex Unit in its original position in the copier.

9 Undo the 2 green screws on the bottom of the Duplex Unit.

1

2

1

13 Close the front, upper right, and left covers to the copier, in that order.


15 Reattach the copy eject tray.

If necessary, reattach the Document Finisher to the copier.


1

10 Lower the Duplex Unit guide plate open and remove any jammed paper without tearing it.

3

2

11 Close the guide plate and reattach the 2 green screws.

9-18

5 Misfeed in the Document Processor

If the message below is displayed, a misfeed has occurred in the

Document Processor. Perform the following procedure to remove the jammed paper.

Inch specification

Paper misfeed.

1.Open cover of Document processor.

2.Lift reversing unit up.

3.Turn the left dial.

4.Remove original.

5.Close cover of Document processor.

JAM 00


Paper misfeed.

JAM 00

1.Open cover of Document processor.

2.Lift reversing unit up.

3.Turn the left knob.

4.Remove original.

5.Close cover of Document processor.


3 If there is an original there, remove the jammed original without tearing it.

* If the original does happen to tear, remove any loose scraps from inside the Document Processor. Loose scraps of paper may cause other originals to misfeed.

4 Lift open the reversing unit.

1 Remove all of the originals remaining in the original table.

2 Open the Document Processor cover.

5 If there is an original there, remove the jammed original without tearing it.

* If the original does happen to tear, remove any loose scraps from inside the Document Processor. Loose scraps of paper may cause other originals to misfeed.

* If the original is difficult to remove, turn the original feed dial as shown in the illustration in order to feed it out to a location that makes it easier to remove.

6 Close the reversing unit in its original position.

7 Close the Document Processor cover.

9-19


6 Misfeed in the optional Document Finisher

If a misfeed occurs in the Document Finisher, refer to the Operation

Guide for your Document Finisher and remove the jammed paper accordingly.

9-20


4. If other trouble occurs

If trouble occurs with your copier, carry out the applicable checkpoints and procedures indicated on the following pages.

If the trouble persists, contact your service representative or authorized service center.

Trouble Checkpoint

Nothing lights on the operation panel when the main switch is turned ON.

Is the power plug connected to an AC outlet?

Procedure

Connect the plug to an AC outlet.

No copies come out when the [Start] key is pressed.

The copies come out blank.

The copies come out too light.

Is there an error message on the touch panel?

Were the originals set correctly?

Check the appropriate response to that message, and perform the corresponding procedure.

When setting originals on the platen, set them face-down.

When setting originals in the Document

Processor, set them face-up.

Is the copier in the auto exposure mode?

In order to adjust the overall exposure level, perform the “Auto exposure adjustment” procedure.

Is the copier in the manual exposure mode?

Adjust the exposure to the correct level using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

To adjust the overall exposure, adjust the exposure for each image quality mode.

Reference page

——

9-1

3-8

3-7

7-51

4-2

7-53

7-54

7-55

3-9

The copies come out too dark.

Is a message that tells you to add toner displayed?

Is the copy paper wet?

Add toner.

Replace the copy paper with new paper.

Is the copier in the auto exposure mode?

In order to adjust the overall exposure level, perform the “Auto exposure adjustment” procedure.

Is the copier in the manual exposure mode?

Adjust the exposure to the correct level using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

To adjust the overall exposure, adjust the exposure for each image quality mode.

3-1

7-51

4-2

7-53

7-54

7-55

9-21


Trouble Checkpoint Procedure

Black lines appear on copies when you feed originals from the Document

Processor (but they do not exist on the originals themselves).

Is the slit glass dirty?

The copies are dirty.

Is the platen or the Document Processor dirty?

The copy image is skewed.

Paper jams occur often.

Were the originals set correctly?

Perform the cleaning operation on the slit glass, or make the lines less apparent by turning black-line correction ON.

Clean the platen and/or the Document

Processor.

When setting originals on the platen, align them securely with appropriate original size indicators.

When setting originals in the Document

Processor, align the original insert guides securely according to the size the originals.

Load the paper properly.

Is the copy paper loaded properly in the drawer[cassette]?

Is the copy paper curled, folded over or wrinkled?

Replace the copy paper with new paper.

Is there any jammed paper or loose scraps of paper remaining inside the copier?

Carry out the appropriate procedure to remove the paper.

Reference page

7-45

10-1

10-1

3-8

3-7

3-1

3-1

9-7

9-22

Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION

INFORMATION

1. Cleaning the copier

CAUTION

For safety purposes, ALWAYS remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning operations.

●

Cleaning the Document Processor

Lift open the Document Processor. Wipe the back side of the

Document Processor with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.

* Never use thinner or other organic solvents to clean the original cover.

* If copies appear soiled, such as black lines appearing on the copy image, while using the Document Processor, the slit glass is dirty.

Wipe the slit glass with a dry cloth or a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

* Never use water, thinner or organic solvents.

●

Cleaning the platen

Lift open the Document Processor. Wipe the platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.

* Never use thinner or other organic solvents to clean the platen.

10-1

Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION

2. Specifications

Type ............................................................................... Console

Original table .................................................................. Main Body: Fixed type

When using the Document Processor: Moving type

Copying system ............................................................. Indirect electrostatic system

Acceptable originals ....................................................... Sheets of paper, books and 3-dimensional objects (Maximum size: 11" x 17" / A3)

Copy sizes ..................................................................... Drawers[Cassettes]: 11" x 17" / A3, 8

1/2

" x 14" / B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 8

1/2

" / A4,

8

1/2

" x 11" / A4R, 5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

" / A5R, and Folio (metric specification copiers) ,

B5, and B5R (Asia Pacific specification copiers)

Multi-bypass tray: 11" x 17" / A3, 8

1/2

" x 14" / B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 8

1/2

" / A4,

8

1/2

" x 11" / A4R, 5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

" / A5R, A6R and Folio (metric specification copiers) ,

B5, B5R, and B6R (Asia Pacific specification copiers)

For 2-sided copying: 11" x 17" / A3 – 5

1/2

" x 8

1/2

" / A5R

Print margin loss: 0.5 mm – 5.5 mm

Copying speed ............................................................... 63 cpm copiers, same size (100%; [1:1]), memory copy

11" x 17" / A3: 32 copies/min., 8

1/2

" x 14" / B4: 38 copies/min.,

11" x 8

1/2

" / A4: 63 copies/min., 8

1/2

" x 11" / A4R: 44 copies/min. ,

B5: 63 copies/min., B5R: 50 copies/min.

75 cpm copiers, same size (100%; [1:1]), memory copy

11" x 17" / A3: 38 copies/min., 8

1/2

" x 14" / B4: 45 copies/min.,

11" x 8

1/2

" / A4: 75 copies/min., 8

1/2

" x 11" / A4R: 52 copies/min. ,

B5: 75 copies/min., B5R: 60 copies/min.

Warm-up time ................................................................. Within 360 secs. (at room temperature of 68



F/20



C, humidity 65%) Recovery from the preheat mode: Within 30 seconds

First copy speed ............................................................. 63 cpm copiers: Approx. 3.6 secs. (11" x 8

1/2

" / A4 horizontal feed from drawer[cassette] No.1)

75 cpm copiers: Approx. 3.2 secs. (11" x 8

1/2

" / A4 horizontal feed from drawer[cassette] No.1)

Available magnification ratios ......................................... Any 1% increment between 25% and 400% or standard pre-set ratios

* Between 25% and 200% when using the Document Processor

Standard Memory .......................................................... 128 MB

Image Storage Memory ................................................. 20 GB

Resolution ...................................................................... Reading: 600 x 600 dpi

Writing: 1800 equivalent x 600 dpi

Paper feed system ......................................................... Automatic feeding from drawers[cassettes] (two 500-sheet capacity drawers[cassettes]

[80 g/m 2 ] and one 3000-sheet capacity drawer[cassette] [80 g/m 2 ]), or from the multi-bypass tray (100 sheet capacity [80 g/m 2 ])

Acceptable copy paper .................................................. <Paper weights>

Drawers[Cassettes]: 60 g/m 2 – 80 g/m 2

Duplex Unit: 64 g/m 2 – 105 g/m 2

Multi-bypass tray: 45 g/m 2 – 200 g/m 2 ; 110 lbs.

<Paper types>

Drawers[Cassettes]: Standard copy paper and color paper

Duplex Unit: Standard copy paper and color paper

Multi-bypass tray: Standard copy paper, letterhead, color paper, tracing paper,

OHP transparencies, envelopes, etc. (envelopes can only be used under the optional printer functions of this machine.)

Continuous copying ....................................................... 1 – 999 sheets

Light source ................................................................... Rare gas lamp

Developing system ......................................................... Dry process

Fixing system ................................................................. Heat roller

Cleaning system ............................................................ Blade and fur brush

Photoconductor .............................................................. a-Si

Standard functions and modes ...................................... Auto paper selection mode, Image quality selection, Auto magnification selection mode,

Zoom mode, Preset zoom mode, XY zoom mode, 2-sided copy modes, Page separation/

Split copy modes, Margin mode, Centering/Image shift mode, Memo mode, Border erase modes, Combine/Merge Copy modes, Print page numbers mode, Form overlay mode,

Booklet/Stitching mode, Book to Booklet mode, Sort/Finished mode, Auto rotation function,

Auto Selection/Filing mode, Cover mode, Transparency + backing sheet mode, Invert mode,

Mirror image mode, Proof mode, Repeat copy mode, Batch scanning mode, Eco print mode, Program function, Job build mode, Form registration, Shared data box, Synergy print boxes, Copy management mode, Weekly timer function, Language selection function

10-2


Power source ................................................................. 63 cpm copiers: 120V AC, 60 Hz, 13 A

220V – 240V AC, 50/60 Hz, 4.9 A (Average)

75 cpm copiers: 120V AC, 60 Hz, 15 A

220V – 240V AC, 50/60 Hz, 7.0 A (Average)

Power consumption ....................................................... 63 cpm copiers: Maximum rated power consumption 1920 W (120V)

2400 W (220-240V)

75 cpm copiers: Maximum rated power consumption 1920 W (120V)

1920 W (220-240V)

Dimensions (W) x (D) x (H) ............................................ 27" x 31

1/2

" x 46

1/2

"

685 mm x 800 mm x 1,181 mm

Weight ............................................................................ Approx. 440 lbs. / Approx. 200 kg

Required space (W) x (D) .............................................. 54

3/4

" x 31

1/2

"

1,390 mm x 800 mm

Optional equipment ........................................................ Side Feeder , Document Finisher, Key Counter,

Printer Kit, Network Scanner Kit and Tandem Copier Kit

(Specifications are subject to change without notice.)

10-3


3. Installing the optional equipment

This section shows where to install the optional units for this copier. For more details, refer to the Operation Guide for the corresponding optional unit.

●

Available optional units

The following optional units can be installed on your copier.

Multi Job Tray Key Counter Printer Kit

Network Scanner Kit

Tandem Copier Kit

Center-folding Unit Document Finisher Side Feeder

10-4


Side Feeder

This unit is an auxiliary paper feed unit that holds up to 4,000 sheets of standard 11" x 8

1/2

" , A4 or B5 size copy paper.

Document Finisher

The Document Finisher stores a large quantity of copies and can sort multiple copy sets (Sort/Finished mode), or it can groups copies made from multiple originals, with all the copies produced from an individual original stacked together in one set (Group mode), by shifting their position of ejection. It can also staple the finished copy sets as well as punch holes in them for filing purposes (optional).

If the optional Center-Folding Unit and Multi Job Tray are installed in your copier as well, you will also be able to use the Center-Folding Unit to center bind and center fold the copy sets and designate them for ejection into the Multi Job Tray.

Multi Job Tray

If the Multi Job Tray is installed in your copier, you can designate finished copies for ejection into that unit.

Center-Folding Unit

If the optional Center-Folding Unit is installed in your copier, you will be able to use that unit to center bind and center fold your copy sets.

Key Counter

The Key Counter is used for checking copier use and is convenient for centralized management of the number of copies made by each department as well as the total number of copies made overall on the machine.

Printer Kit

If the Printer Kit is installed in your copier, you can use the copier as a printer. For more details, refer to the Operation Guide for the Printer Kit.

Since a networking board is installed as standard equipment in the copier, access from multiple computers is possible and the machine can be used as a network printer.

Network Scanner Kit

If the Network Scanner Kit is installed in your copier, you can use the copier as a scanner from multiple computers over your network.

Tandem Copier Kit

The Tandem Copier Kit is required when two copy machines are connected together. Connecting two copy machines will increase copy management speed two-fold. In addition, for example, if copying is stopped in one copier due to insufficient toner or other such reason, the remaining copies will be automatically produced in the other copier.

10-5

Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart

This copier contains many different functions and settings, and many of them can be used in combination for more efficient copying.

Refer to the following chart for details on combining specific functions and settings.

: Combination is possible

---: Combination is NOT possible

01: Auto exposure adjustment is not available for the photo mode. The text+photo mode, the text mode, or manual exposure adjustment will be selected.

02: Only the auto magnification selection mode is available. That mode will be selected.

03: Only same size (100% [1:1]) copying in the auto paper selection mode is available. That mode will be selected.

04: The margin mode and the booklet/stitching mode, or book to booklet mode, cannot be used in combination with each other.

05: The function selected second will take priority and original size selection (auto selection) will engage.

06: The border erase modes and the auto selection/filing mode cannot be used in combination with each other.

07: The border erase modes and the custom original size setting cannot be used in combination with each other.

08: The sheet erase mode and the book erase mode cannot be used in combination with each other.

09: The transparency + backing sheet mode and the 2-sided copy modes cannot be used in combination with each other.

10: Cannot be used in combination with auto selection/filing mode.

11: The 2-sided copy modes and the invert mode cannot be used in combination with each other.

Function selected second

Function selected first

Image quality (text mode)

Image quality (photo mode)

Image quality (text+photo mode)

Copy exposure (manual exposure adjustment)

Copy exposure (auto exposure adjustment)

Auto paper selection mode (Same size: 100% [1:1])

Auto paper selection mode (enlargement/reduction)

Auto magnification selection mode

Same size (100% [1:1]) copying

Zoom mode

Preset zoom mode

XY zoom mode

Eco print mode

Margin mode

Centering/Image shift mode

Border erase (sheet erase mode)

Border erase (book erase mode)

1-sided copying (1-sided R 1-sided)



2-sided copying (book R 2-sided)

Page separation/Split copy (2-sided R 1-sided)

Page separation/Split copy (book R 1-sided)

Booklet/Stitching mode

Book to Booklet mode

Cover mode

Transparency + backing sheet mode

Paper selection

Original set direction

Original size selection (standard size)

Original size selection (custom size)

Original size selection (auto selection)

Original size selection (filing)

Sort mode

Finished mode

Staple mode

Punch mode

Copy eject location

Invert mode

Mirror image mode

Print page numbers mode

Form overlay mode

Combine/Merge Copy modes

Memo mode

Batch scanning mode

Proof mode

Repeat copy mode (settings)

Repeat copy mode (print out)

Document management functions (form registration)

Document management functions (shared data box [storing documents])

Document management functions (synergy print boxes [storing documents])

Document management functions (shared data box [printing out documents])

Document management functions (synergy print boxes [printing out documents])

Output management functions (interrupt print)

Job build copying (step 1)

Job build copying (from step 2)

Interrupt copying

Scanner functions (Scan to PC)

Scanner functions (Send E-mail)

Scanner functions (TWAIN)

01

01

02

02

02

02

02

03

02

03 03

02

03

02

03

02

03

02

02

02

02

02

02 02 02

02

02

02

02

04

04

26

27

08

28

07

06

06

07

06

06

12

12

12

12

12

12

09 09 09

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

16

17

18

17

18

10

14

13

05

10

10

11 11 11

15

15

15

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

02

04 04

08

14

13

05

10

10

14

05

19

20

05

19

20

23 23

11 11

15

15

15

25

26

27

25

26

27

10-6

Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart

12: The booklet/stitching mode and book to booklet mode will be given second priority when the

2-sided copy modes or the page separation/ split copy modes are selected.

13: Open-faced originals cannot be used in combination with original size selection.

14: Not available because open-faced originals must be set with the top edge towards the rear of the copier.

15: Not available in combination with open-faced originals.

09

09

09

17

17

16

18

18

17

17

17

17

17

18

18

18

10

18

18

18

17 18

17

17

24

03

03

03

03

03

03

02

02

02

02

02

02

07

07

06

06

06

06

14 13 13 10 10

14

14

13 13

21

21

17

18

10

19

19

17

18

28

10

20

20

17

18

19

20

19

20

10

19

19

20

20

19

21

21

19

19

19

19

20

20

20

20

29

16: The book R page separation/split copy mode and the transparency + backing sheet mode cannot be used in combination with each other.

17: Not available in combination with the cover mode.

18: Not available in combination with the transparency + backing sheet mode.

19: Not available in combination with original size selection (auto selection).

20: Not available in combination with original size selection (filing).

18 18 18

22

19

22

23

23

11

11

11

11

11

17

18

25

02

02

02

02

02 02

26 27

15 15 15

15

25

25

15

26

26

17

15

27

27

17

19

20

19

20

21

19

20

21

19

20 20

25

25

25 26

25

26

21: Not available in combination with the original size selection.

22: The finished mode and the staple mode cannot be used in combination with each other.

23: The punch mode cannot be used in combination with each other.

24: The original set direction cannot be selected because the book erase mode was selected and originals must be set with the top edge towards the rear of the copier.

25: Not available in combination with the form overlay mode.

26: Not available in combination with the combine/merge copy mode.

27: The memo mode cannot be used in combination with each other.

28: The selected paper setting will be canceled in order to switch to the auto paper selection mode.

29: The batch scanning operation, selected first, will be canceled.

¡ Insert blank sheet

™

Start on front of copy

£

Enter number of copies (copy sets) to be made

Function selected second

25

Function selected first

Image quality (text mode)

Image quality (photo mode)

Image quality (text+photo mode)

Copy exposure (manual exposure adjustment)

Copy exposure (auto exposure adjustment)

Auto paper selection mode (Same size: 100% [1:1])

Auto paper selection mode (enlargement/reduction)

Auto magnification selection mode

Same size (100% [1:1]) copying

Zoom mode

Preset zoom mode

XY zoom mode

Eco print mode

Margin mode

Centering/Image shift mode

Border erase (sheet erase mode)

Border erase (book erase mode)




2-sided copying (book R 2-sided)

Page separation/Split copy (2-sided R 1-sided)

Page separation/Split copy (book R 1-sided)

Booklet/Stitching mode

Book to Booklet mode

Cover mode

Transparency + backing sheet mode

Paper selection

Original set direction

Original size selection (standard size)

Original size selection (custom size)

Original size selection (auto selection)

Original size selection (filing)

Sort mode

Finished mode

Staple mode

Punch mode

Copy eject location

Invert mode

Mirror image mode

Print page numbers mode

Form overlay mode

Combine/Merge Copy modes

Memo mode

Batch scanning mode

Proof mode

Repeat copy mode (settings)

Repeat copy mode (print out)

Document management functions (form registration)

Document management functions (shared data box [storing documents])

Document management functions (synergy print boxes [storing documents])

Document management functions (shared data box [printing out documents])

Document management functions (synergy print boxes [printing out documents])

Output management functions (interrupt print)

Job build copying (step 1)

Job build copying (from step 2)

Interrupt copying

Scanner functions (Scan to PC)

Scanner functions (Send E-mail)

Scanner functions (TWAIN)

10-7

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM

1. Safety of laser beam

This copier has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U.S.

DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.

2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.

Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976.

The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the

United States.

On this copier, the label is on the rear.

3. Optical unit

When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible.

Shown at left is the label located on the cover of the optical unit.

4. Maintenance

For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.

5. Safety switch

The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.

CAUTION!

The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.

ATTENTION !

Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension.

Les interrupteurs sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement : ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.

NOTE : Deck unit connector output is non-Class

II

: Finisher connector output is non-Class

II